CA Review TL
Meeting Date: July 22, 2025
To: Mayor and City Council
From: Geoff Patnoe, City Manager
Staff Contact: Si Phan, Associate Engineer
[email protected], 442-339-5219
Subject: Adoption of Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents, Authorization to Advertise for Construction Bids for the Harding Community Center Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning Refurbishment Project and Appropriation of Additional Project Funding
District: 1
Rec
ommended Actions
Adopt a resolution adopting the plans, specifications and contract documents, authorizing the City Clerk to advertise for construction bids and appropriating additional funds for the Harding Community Center Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning Refurbishment Project.
Executive Summary
The Harding Community Center Refurbishment Project was initially developed to refurbish specific aging elements of the facility and to implement various security enhancements. The project’s scope was expanded in 2024 to include replacement of the Heritage Hall auditorium’s heating system and installation of a new air conditioning system.
Staff have completed the design work necessary to get the final phase of the project, the Harding Community Center Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning Refurbishment Project, ready for bidding, including obtaining an approved building permit that is ready to be issued. The system being proposed is more energy efficient and will reduce this city facility’s greenhouse gas emissions.
Carlsbad Municipal Code Section 3.28.080(E) requires City Council adoption of plans, specifications and contract documents for projects when the expected value of work is more than $220,000. The total estimated construction cost for the project is $630,644, including contingency, construction management and inspection services, so this project requires City Council approval.
Staff recommend that the City Council adopt the plans, specifications and contract documents, authorize the City Clerk to advertise the project for construction bids and appropriate additional funds in an amount not to exceed $212,000.
July 22, 2025
Item #3 Page 1 of 7
Docusign Envelope ID: 914F708F-608E-4D5C-916D-6006BEE20D2B Explanation & Analysis
The Harding Community Center, at 3096 Harding St., as shown in Exhibit 2, consists of four distinct buildings: the Recreation Hall, “D” Building, Administration Building and the Heritage Hall auditorium.
The 4,872-square-foot Heritage Hall was built in the 1940s. With a seating capacity of 250, the auditorium is one of the most popular meeting space rental facilities owned by the city.
Staff assessed the auditorium’s condition in 2023 and determined the existing forced-air gas heaters, believed to be more than 60 years old, were beyond the end of their useful life and should be replaced.
Community members and city staff have also reported concerns in recent years about the lack of air conditioning inside the auditorium. Staff recommend replacing the existing gas heaters with a new energy-efficient combination heat pump heating ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) system.
The new system will include:
• Four new outdoor condensing split units with heat pumps for heating and cooling, which are more compact and energy-efficient than traditional condensing units • Four new indoor air blower units to distribute air throughout the auditorium • New and more efficient components for temperature settings • Insulated ductwork that will replace the existing system ductwork Replacing the old gas-fueled heaters with electric heat pumps will reduce greenhouse gas emissions at the facility, in keeping with the city’s Climate Action Plan. (The plan’s Measure E-1 calls for increased use of renewable electricity at municipal facilities.) Fiscal Analysis
This project, Capital Improvement Program Project No. 4708, is funded from the Infrastructure Replacement Fund, and an additional appropriation in an amount not to exceed $212,000 from the Infrastructure Replacement Fund is needed to complete it. Sufficient funds are available in the Infrastructure Replacement Fund to cover this expense.
Harding Center Refurbishment Project
Capital Improvement Program Project No. 4708
Total appropriation to date $605,000
Total expenditures and encumbrances to date -$185,613
Total available funding $419,387
Construction contract (engineer’s estimate) -$546,044
Construction contingency (estimated) -$54,600
Construction management and inspection services (estimated) -$30,000 Total estimated construction costs -$630,644
Remaining balance -$211,257
Additional appropriation needed (rounded) $212,000
July 22, 2025
Item #3 Page 2 of 7
Docusign Envelope ID: 914F708F-608E-4D5C-916D-6006BEE20D2B
Next Steps
With the City Council’s adoption of the resolution, the City Clerk will advertise the project for construction bidding. Staff anticipate returning to the City Council in fall 2025 to request the award of a construction contract.
Once the new equipment is delivered, construction is expected to take approximately two months.
Environmental E valuation
The proposed action for construction to replace the existing gas heaters with a new energy- efficient combination heat pump HVAC system is categorically exempt from environmental review under the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) Guidelines Section 15301 because it involves the maintenance, repair or minor alteration of existing facilities with negligible or no expansion of the existing or former use. No exceptions to the categorical exemption as set forth in CEQA Guidelines Section 15300.2 or Carlsbad Municipal Code Section 19.04.070(C) apply.
Exhibits
1. City Council resolution
2. Location map
3. Plans, specifications and contract documents ( on file in the Office of the City Clerk) July 22, 2025
Item #3 Page 3 of 7
Docusign Envelope ID: 914F708F-608E-4D5C-916D-6006BEE20D2B Exhibit 1
RESOLUTION NO. 2025-173 .
A RE
SOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF CARLSBAD,
CALIFORNIA, ADOPTING THE PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT
DOCUMENTS, AUTHORIZING THE CITY CLERK TO ADVERTISE FOR
CONSTRUCTION BIDS AND APPROPRIATING ADDITIONAL FUNDS FOR THE
HARDING COMMUNITY CENTER HEATING VENT ILATION AND AIR
CONDITIONING REFURBISHMENT PROJECT
WHE
REAS, the City Council of the City of Carlsbad, California has determined it necessary, desirable and in the public interest to construct the Harding Community Center Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning, or HVAC, Refurbishment Project, or Project; and WHEREAS, this Project will replace the existing gas heaters with a new energy -efficient combination heat pump HVAC system at the Harding Community Center Auditorium; and WHEREAS, this Project is the final phase of the Harding Center Refurbishment P roject, Capital Improvement Program Project No. 4708; and
WHEREAS, the plans, specifications and contract documents for the Project have been prepared, are on file at the City Clerk’s office and are incorporated herein by reference; and WHEREAS, staff reviewed the building plans, specifications and cost estimates developed by a consultant and determined that the proposed design meets the city’s engineering codes, standards and policies and that the proposed construction work would ameliorate conditions associated with aging heating systems and the lack of air conditioning; and
WHEREAS, Carlsbad Municipal Code Section 3.28.080(E) requires the City Council to approve plans, specifications and contract documents for all construction projects that are to be formally bid upon when the value exceeds $220,000; and
WHEREAS, t he total cost of the Project is estimated to be $ 630,644 including construction contingency, construction management and inspection; and WHEREAS, staff request an additional appropriation of $21 2,000 from the Infrastructure Replacement Fund to fund construction of the Project.
NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED by the City Council of the City of Carlsbad, California, as follows:
1. That the above recitations are true and correct.
July 22, 2025
Item #3 Page 4 of 7
Docusign Envelope ID: 914F708F-608E-4D5C-916D-6006BEE20D2B
2. Th at the City Council has determined that the proposed action for construction to replace the existing gas heaters with a new energy -efficient combination heat pump HVAC system is categorically exempt from environmental review under the California Environmental Quality Act, or CEQA , Guidelines Section 15301 because it involves the maintenance, repair or minor alteration of existing facilities with negligible or no expansion of the existing or former use. No exceptions to the categorical exemption as set forth in CEQA Guidelines Section 15300.2 or Carlsbad Municipal Code Section
19.04.070(C) apply.
3. That the plans, specifications and contract documents for the Harding Community Center HVAC Refurbishment Project are hereby approved and the City Clerk is authorized to advertise for bids.
4. That the City Manager or designee is authorized to appropriate $21 2,000 from the Infrastructure Replacement Fund to fund construction of the Project.
PASSED, APPROVED AND ADOPTED at a Regular Meeting of the City Council of the City o
f Carlsbad on the 22nd day of July, 2025, by the following vote, to wit:
AYES: Blackburn, Bhat-Patel, Acosta, Burkholder, Shin.
NAYS: None.
ABSTAIN: None.
ABSENT: None.
____________________
__________________
KEITH BLACKBURN, Mayor
______________________________________
SHERRY FREISINGER, City Clerk
(SEAL)
July 22, 2025
Item #3 Page 5 of 7
Docusign Envelope ID: 914F708F-608E-4D5C-916D-6006BEE20D2B
OAK AV
I-5
HARDING ST
PINE AV
JEFFERSON ST ALLEY
JEFFERSON ST
HOPE AV ALLEY
CARLSBAD VILLAGE DR
PLOTTED BY: Andy Chang PLOT DATE: 6/13/2025 PATH: J:\AC_Customers\Si_Phan\4078_HardingCtr_Refurbishment\4078_HardingCtr_Refurbishment.mxd
PROJECT NAME EXHIBITPROJECT
NUMBER
4708 2
HARDING COMMUNITY CENTER
REFURBISHMENT HEATING VENTILATION
AND AIR CONDITIONING PROJECT
LOCATION MAP
CARLSBAD
VISTA
SAN MARCOS
ENCINITAS
OCEANSIDE
SITE
VACINITY MAP
3096 HARDING ST
Exhibit 2
July 22, 2025
Item #3 Page 6 of 7
Docusign Envelope ID: 914F708F-608E-4D5C-916D-6006BEE20D2B Exhibit 3
Pl
ans, specifications and contract documents
(on file in the Office of the City Clerk)
July 22, 2025
Item #3 Page 7 of 7
Docusign Envelope ID: 914F708F-608E-4D5C-916D-6006BEE20D2B
SCOPE OF WORK
APPLICABLE CODES
PROJECT DATA
PROJECT DIRECTORY
OWNER:
ARCHITECT OF RECORD: IDS Group
Irvine, California 92606
John Silber
[email protected]
949.387.8500
John Silber - Principal Architect
Tel:
Email:
Contact:
MECHANICAL ENGINEER:
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER:
Tel:
Email:
Contact:
IDS Group
1 Peters Canyon Road, Suite 130
Irvine, California 92606
949.387.8500
PLUMBING:
Tel:
Email:
Contact:
IDS Group
1 Peters Canyon Road, Suite 130
Irvine, California 92606
Darren Smith
[email protected]
949.387.8500
Darren Smith
Darren Smith
[email protected]
Darren Smith
1 Peters Canyon Road, Suite 130
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: IDS Group
REPLACE THE EXISTING SUPPLY AIR UNIT WITH NEW SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP FAN COIL UNIT COMPLETE WITH MATCHING CONDENSING UNIT, 100% OUTSIDE
AIR ECONOMIZER AND BAROMETRIC RELIEF AND NEW LOCAL PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL.
· 2022 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS CODE, PART 1, TITLE 24 C.C.R. · 2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE (CBC), PART 2, TITLE 24 C.C.R. · 2022 CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE (CEC), PART 3.
· TITLE 24 C.C.R. (2022 NEC)
· 2022 CALIFORNIA FIRE CODE, PART 9, TITLE 24 C.C.R.
· 2022 TITLE 19 C.C.R. PUBLIC SAFETY, STATE FIRE MARSHAL REGULATIONS. · 2022 CALIFORNIA GREEN STANDARD CODE.
· 2022 CALIFORNIA MECHANICAL CODE (CMC)
· 2022 CALIFORNIA PLUMBING CODE (CPC)
· 2010 AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT.
PROJECT LOCATION: 3096 HARDING ST.
CARLSBAD, CA 92008
ZONE: GC (GOVERNMENT CENTER)
CONSTRUCTION TYPE: V, NON RATED
OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION: A3 & B
NUMBER OF STORIES: 2 STORIES
SPRINKLERED: YES
IDS Group
1 Peters Canyon Road, Suite 130
Irvine, California 92606
Tel: 949.387.8500
Email:
Contact:
[email protected]
Steven Collins
Steven Collins
City of Carlsbad Public Works
Contracts Administration
1635 FARADAY AVE.
CARLSBAD, CA 92008
Contact: John Maashoff, PROJECT MANAGER
Tel: XX
Email: [email protected]
CITY OF CARLSBAD
HARDING CENTER REFURBISHMENT - HERITAGE HALL HVAC.
3096 HARDING ST. CARLSBAD, CA 92008
FACILITY MAP
VICINITY MAP SHEET INDEX
COVER SHEETG-001
PROJECT
LOCATION
M-001 NOTES LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS
M-002 SCHEDULES
M-101 DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN
M-201 PROPOSED FLOOR PLAN
M-202 SECTION
M-301 ELEVATION VIEW AND CONTROLS
M-501 DETAILS
M-701 TITLE 24
ARCHITECTURAL
ELECTRICAL
MECHANICAL
E-001 GENERAL NOTE, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS
E-002 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM & PANEL SCHEDULES
E-100 FLOOR PLANS ELECTRICAL
N
N
STRUCTURAL
S-001 GENERAL NOTE
S-002 GENERAL NOTE
S-003 GENERAL NOTE
S-201 ROOF PLAN
S-501 SECTION AND DETAILS
S-502 SECTION AND DETAILS
S-503 SECTION AND DETAILS
DEFERRED SUBMITTAL:
FIRE SPRINKLER - RELOCATION OF EXISTING PIPING AND SPRINKLER HEADS TO ACCOMMODATE NEW FAN COIL UNITS.
Tel:
Email:
Contact:
1 Peters Canyon Road, Suite 130
Irvine, California 92606
949.387.8500
Rami Elhassan
[email protected]
Rami Elhassan
SHEET NAMEDRAWING
No.
SHEET
No.
02 03
04 05
06 07
08 09
10 11
12 13
14 15
16 17
18 01
19 HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC
DRAFT IMPROVEMENT PLANS - CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISMENT HERITAGE HALL HVAC 30% CD04/02/24 --
3096 HARDING STREET, CARLSBAD, CA 92008
90% CD05/10/24 --
1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130
IRVINE, CA. 92606
TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800
IDS
IDS GROUP
Project # 22X006.03
PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/11/24 --
18 L
ICENSED ARCHITECT
JOHN
JOSEPH SILBER
STATE
OF CA L I FORN
IA
No. C15573
EXP. 07-31-25
JS
DV
-
COVER SHEET
G-001
01 19
P L A N R E V I E W A P P R O V A L
THESE PLANS/DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN
REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS
CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA AND AMENDED BY THE
JURISDICTION. PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF
DOCUMENTS DOES NOT AUTHORIZE
CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF
ANY FEDERAL, STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.
BY: _________________ DATE: ________________
True North Compliance Services, Inc.
THIS SET OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MUST BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES
AND IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE ANY CHANGES OR
ALTERATIONS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM THE
CITY. OCCUPANCY OF STRUCTURE(S) IS NOT
PERMITTED UNTIL FINAL APPROVAL IS GRANTED
BY ALL APPLICABLE DEPARTMENTS.
Ali Al-Murshid
10/25/24
CBC2024-0329_PLANS_V1 11/6/24
Exhibit 3
A. GENERAL:
1. SCOPE OF WORK INCLUDES WORK SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND DESCRIBED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS, WHETHER SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS OR NOT. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE INTENDED TO COVER THE ENTIRE INSTALLATION OF A COMPLETE AND FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM TO OPERATE AS DESCRIBED.
2. THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS REPRESENT THE FINISHED WORK. THEY DO NOT INDICATE THE METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPERVISE AND DIRECT THE WORK AND SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CONSTRUCTION MEANS AND METHODS, TECHNIQUES, SEQUENCES AND PROCEDURES.
3. THESE DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC. ALL TURNS, BENDS, AND ELEVATION CHANGES ARE NOT SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ASSUME FULL RESPONSIBILITY OF COORDINATION WITH VARIOUS TRADES AND INCLUDE ALL TURNS, BENDS, ADDITIONAL LENGTHS OF DUCTS, AND TRANSITIONS WITHOUT ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER.
4. THE CONTRACTOR MUST EXAMINE ALL CONSTRAINTS AND THE AVAILABLE SPACE AT THE SITE THAT MAY REQUIRE CUSTOM FABRICATION. DISASSEMBLY AND RE-ASSEMBLY OF CERTAIN EQUIPMENT AT THE FINAL LOCATION OF THE JOB SITE. NO CHANGE ORDER WILL BE GRANTED TO MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR AFTER COMMENCING WORK DUE TO EXISTING CONDITION.
5. PROTECT ALL MATERIALS INCLUDING DUCTS AND PIPES FROM DUST AND DEBRIS AND KEEP OPEN END OF PIPES AND DUCTS COVERED AT ALL TIMES UNTIL READY FOR INSTALLATION OF NEXT SEGMENT OF WORK.
6. WORK DAMAGED OR CUT INTO DURING CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE PATCHED, REPAIRED, PAINTED AND FINISHED TO MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT SURFACES IN TEXTURE, COLOR, AND FINISH.
7. ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, AND INSTALLATION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST CALIFORNIA MECHANICAL CODE.
8. ALL INSULATION SHALL COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF TITLE 24 CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS IN ADDITION TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF SPECIFICATIONS.
9. INSTALL EQUIPMENT IN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION AND PROVIDE ADEQUATE SERVICE CLEARANCE FOR NORMAL MAINTENANCE WITHOUT REQUIRING REMOVAL OF ARCHITECTURAL, ELECTRICAL OR STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS.
10. FOR EQUIPMENT LOCATED ABOVE CEILING, INSTALL SUCH EQUIPMENT CLOSE ENOUGH TO THE CEILING ELEVATION TO FACILITATE READY ACCESS FOR MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING.
11. CUTTING, BORING, SAWCUTTING OR DRILLING THROUGH STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS TO BE DONE ONLY WHEN SO DETAILED ON THE DRAWINGS OR ACCEPTED BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER.
12. VERIFY ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS PRIOR TO BID AND MATERIAL PURCHASE.
13. COORDINATE TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND THERMOSTAT LOCATION WITH FLOOR PLANS AND ELEVATION WITH LIGHT SWITCH/FIRE ALARM DEVICES. TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND THERMOSTAT ELEVATION SHALL BE SAME ELEVATION AS LIGHT SWITCH/FIRE ALARM DEVICES.
B. DUCTWORK:
1. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, ALL DIMENSIONS FOR DUCTS, GRILLES, DAMPERS, ETC. ARE IN INCHES.
2. MATERIAL EXPOSED WITHIN A DUCT OR PLENUM SHALL COMPLY WITH SECTION 602, CMC.
3. DUCT PRESSURE CLASS BETWEEN AIR HANDLING UNITS AND THE INLET TO AIR TERMINAL UNITS SHALL BE BASED ON THE TOTAL
STATIC PRESSURE OF THE CORRESPONDING AIR HANDLING UNIT AND SUCH DUCTS SHALL BE PRESSURE TESTED FOR LEAKS PER SMACNA STANDARDS BEFORE CONCEALING DUCTS AND BEFORE CONNECTING TO AIR TERMINAL UNITS. OTHER DUCTWORK
LOCATED IN SHAFTS OR ENCLOSURES SHALL ALSO BE PRESSURE TESTED PER REQUIREMENTS AS STATED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS.
4. PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL NECESSARY ACCESS DOORS AND CEILING ACCESS PANELS FOR DAMPERS AND CONTROLS.
COORDINATE WITH CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM.
5. FOR EXACT LOCATIONS OF DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES, SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS.
6. COORDINATE THE CORRECT TYPE OF CEILING DIFFUSER AND REGISTER MARGINS TO BE INSTALLED WITH CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM TO BE USED.
7. PROVIDE MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS ON RETURN AND EXHAUST DUCT BRANCHES, AND SUPPLY DUCT BRANCHES DOWNSTREAM OF THE AIR TERMINAL UNITS FOR PROPER BALANCING OF THE AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER AT DIFFUSERS AND REGISTERS SHALL NOT BE USED FOR AIR BALANCING. ALL REQUIRED MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS MAY NOT BE SHOWN ON PLANS.
8. PROVIDE MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS AT SUPPLY, RETURN, AND EXHAUST MAIN DUCTS AT THE LOCATION WHERE SUCH DUCTS ARE CONNECTING TO THE CORRESPONDING DUCT RISER AT EACH FLOOR. LOCATE DAMPERS NEAR (BUT NOT INSIDE) THE SHAFT ENCLOSURE.
9. PROVIDE MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER REMOTE REGULATOR FOR THE MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER LOCATED ABOVE INACCESSIBLE CEILING AND AT THE LOCATION NOT READILY ACCESSIBLE. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE AND FLOOR PLANS FOR LOCATIONS. OBTAIN APPROVAL FROM THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE WHERE AN ACCESS DOOR/PANEL IS SUBSTITUTED IN LIEU OF REMOTE REGULATOR.
10. PROVIDE DOUBLE RADIUS TURNING VANES IN ALL RECTANGULAR RIGHT ANGLE DUCT ELBOWS.
11. ALL CIRCULAR METAL DUCTWORK SHALL BE SPIRAL WITH PRE-FABRICATED SOLDERED FITTINGS.
12. ALL ROUND DUCT TAKEOFFS FROM RECTANGULAR DUCT SHALL BE MADE WITH FACTORY FABRICATED SPIN-IN FITTINGS WITH SCOOP EXTRACTOR AND LOCKING QUADRANT BUTTERFLY DAMPER.
13. FLEXIBLE ROUND DUCT SHALL BE USED ONLY FOR FINAL CONNECTIONS TO VAV BOXES, DIFFUSERS AND REGISTERS. RUNS SHALL BE LIMITED TO 5 FEET MAXIMUM. MINIMUM RADIUS OF TURNS OR BENDS OF FLEXIBLE DUCT SHALL BE 1-1/2 TIMES DIAMETER OF DUCT.
14. DUCT LOCATED UPSTREAM AND WHERE SUCH DUCT IS 10 FEET OR LESS BETWEEN THE AIR TERMINAL UNIT INLET AND THE MAIN DUCT SHALL BE SAME SIZE AS THE TERMINAL UNIT INLET. OTHERWISE, SIZE DUCT LOCATED UPSTREAM OF AIR TERMINAL UNIT PER SIZE AS NOTED ON FLOOR PLANS.
15. PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY PLENUMS OR TRANSITIONS FOR FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS TO DIFFUSERS AND REGISTERS.
16. ALL DUCTWORK IN RETURN AIR PLENUM SHALL BE INSULATED WITH 1-1/2" THICK FIBERGLASS BLANKET (0.75 LBS. PER CUBIC FOOT) WITH VAPOR BARRIER AND U.L. LISTED.
17. COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL AND ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN PLANS FOR LOCATION OF POWER AND LOCAL DISCONNECTS FOR COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS.
A, AMPS AMPERES
ABV ABOVE
AD ACCESS DOOR
AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR
AMB AMBIENT
AP ACCESS PANEL
ARCH ARCHITECTURAL
AUTO AUTOMATIC
BD BACK DRAFT DAMPER
BDD BACK DRAFT DAMPER
BEL BELOW
BHP BRAKE HORSEPOWER
BTUH BRITISH THERMAL UNITS PER HOUR
CAP CAPACITY
CD CEILING DIFFUSER
CDP CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE
CFM CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE
CFSD COMBINATION FIRE SMOKE DAMPER
CLG CEILING
COMP COMPRESSOR
COND CONDITION
COP COEFFICIENT OF PERFORMANCE
dB DECIBEL
DB DRY BULB TEMPERATURE
DDC DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL
DEFL DEFLECTION
DL DOOR LOUVER
DN DOWN
DPSW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
DSW DISCONNECT SWITCH
DWGS DRAWINGS
E EXISTING
EA EACH
EER ENERGY EFFICIENCY RATIO
EF EXHAUST FAN
EFF EFFICIENCY
EG EXHAUST GRILLE
ELECT ELECTRICAL
ELEV ELEVATION
ENCL ENCLOSURE
ENT ENTERING
ESP EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
EVAP EVAPORATOR, EVAPORATIVE
EXH EXHAUST
°F DEGREES FAHRENHEIT
FA FRESH AIR OR OUTSIDE AIR
FC FAN COIL
FLA FULL LOAD AMPS
FLEX FLEXIBLE
FS FLOOR SINK
FSW FLOW SWITCH
H HEIGHT
HP HORSEPOWER
HR HOUR
HTG HEATING
HVAC HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
HZ HERTZ
IN WG INCHES WATER GAUGE
ABBREVIATION IDENTIFICATION
DROP IN DUCTWORK
CEILING SUPPLY, TYPECD-2
200FLOW (CFM)
(IN DIRECTION OF AIR FLOW)
RG-1
300
FIRE DAMPER AND ACCESS DOOR
COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER
RISE IN DUCTWORK
TERMINAL AIR UNIT W/ REHEAT COIL
D
UP
SMOKE DAMPER
(IN DIRECTION OF AIR FLOW)
FD
SD
DUCT FLEXIBLE CONNECTION
BACK DRAFT DAMPER
TV
DUCT FITTING
RADIUS ELBOW
DUCT TRANSITION
OUTSIDE AIR DUCT
VANED ELBOW
(SUPPLY AIR OR FAN DISCHARGE)
DUCT UNDER POSITIVE PRESSURE
DUCT UNDER NEGATIVE PRESSURE
DUCTWORK WITH ACOUSTIC LINING
EXHAUST DUCT
RETURN DUCT
SINGLE LINE DUCTWORK, NEW
SYMBOLDESCRIPTION
BDD
300
EG-1
CONDENSATE DRAINCD
MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER
CEILING RETURN, TYPE
FLOW (CFM)
CEILING EXHAUST, TYPE
FLOW (CFM)
GENERAL NOTESMECHANICAL SYMBOLS ABBREVIATIONS
KW KILOWATT
L LENGTH
LBS POUNDS
LRA LOCKED ROTOR AMPERES
LVG LEAVING
MAX MAXIMUM
MBH THOUSAND BRITISH THERMAL UNITS PER HOUR
MCA MINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPACITY
MCC MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
MD MOTORIZED DAMPER
MFGR MANUFACTURER
MIN MINIMUM
MOCP MAXIMUM OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
N NEW
NC NOISE CRITERIA
NEMA NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION
OBD OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER
OC ON CENTER
OPER OPERATING
OPNG OPENING
OP WT OPERATING WEIGHT
PD PRESSURE DROP
PH PHASE
POC POINT OF CONNECTION
PR PRESSURE
PSI POUND PER SQUARE INCH
QTY QUANTITY
RA RETURN AIR
REFR REFRIGERANT
RH RELATIVE HUMIDITY
RLA RATED LOAD AMPERES
REL RELOCATED
SA SUPPLY AIR
SC SENSIBLE CAPACITY
SCOP SENSIBLE COEFFICIENT OF PERFORMANCE
SD SMOKE DETECTOR
SF SQUARE FEET
SHT SHEET
SS STAINLESS STEEL
SW SWITCH
TAD TRANSFER DUCT
TC TOTAL CAPACITY
TEMP TEMPERATURE
TSP TOTAL STATIC PRESSURE
TYP TYPICAL
UC UNDER CUT
UL UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORY
UON UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
UTR UP THRU ROOF
V VOLTS
W WIDTH
W/ WITH
WB WET BULB TEMPERATURE
WT WEIGHT
ABBREVIATION IDENTIFICATION SUSPENDED UTILITY SYSTEMS WHICH INCLUDE:
· ELECTRICAL, MECHANICAL, AND PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND ASSOCIATED CONDUIT, DUCTWORK, AND PIPING ARE
REQUIRED TO HAVE SEISMIC RESTRAINT ATTACHMENTS DESIGNED TO RESIST THE TOTAL DESIGN SEISMIC FORCES PRESCRIBED IN SECTION 1613A. PROVIDE TYPICAL SEISMIC RESTRAINT DETAILS. DOCUMENTATION SUBSTANTIATING COMPLIANCE WITH SECTION 1613A OF THE 2022 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE) TO INCLUDE SEISMIC RESTRAINT ASSEMBLY DETAILS. ANCHORAGE TO OVERHEAD STRUCTURES WITH SUPPORTING ENGINEERING STAMP BY A LICENSED CIVIL OR STRUCTURAL ENGINEER IS REQUIRED AT TIME OF INSPECTION.
NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND ATTACHMENTS · PROVIDE DETAILS ON THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND SUBSTANTIATING CALCULATIONS (WHEN NECESSARY)
FOR THE SUPPORTS AND ATTACHMENTS OF NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT UNLESS THEY ARE EXEMPTED FROM PLAN REVIEW BY 2022 CBC SECTIONS 1616A.1.18. THE SUPPORTS AND ATTACHMENTS DETAILS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH THE CALCULATIONS AND THE MANUFACTURE'S LITERATURE. SKETCHES SHOWN IN THE CALCULATIONS FOR THE PURPOSE OF ILLUSTRATING THE ANALYTICAL METHOD ARE NOT ADEQUATE.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND ATTACHMENTS
· SUPPORTS AND ATTACHMENTS OF ALL EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED AS A PART OF THIS PROJECT SHALL BE DETAILED ON CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, EXCEPT THOSE EXEMPT BY THE 2022 CBC SECTION 1616A.1.18. · EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND ATTACHMENTS SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE APPROPRIATE DESIGN PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD AS A PART OF FIELD REVIEW/OBSERVATIONS. THE INSPECTOR OF RECORD (IOR) SHALL ASSURE THAT THE ABOVE REQUIREMENTS ARE ENFORCED. (2022 CBC SECTIONS 107 AND 1616A)
PIPES, DUCTS, AND CONDUITS SUPPORTS, ATTACHMENTS, AND BRACING · PROVIDE CALCULATIONS AND DETAILS FOR SUPPORTS, ATTACHMENTS, AND BRACING OF ALL PIPES, DUCTS, AND CONDUITS. IF A PRE-APPROVED SYSTEM IS SPECIFIED (THE OPM NUMBERS FOR THE ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATIVES
SHALL BE SPECIFIED ON THE DRAWINGS) CERTAIN CALCULATIONS AND DETAILS FOR THE SUPPORTING STRUCTURE ARE STILL REQUIRED.
· (2022 CAC SECTIONS 7-115, 7-126, AND CBC 2022 SECTION 107)
PRE-APPROVED PIPES, DUCTS, AND CONDUITS SEISMIC BRACING A. LAYOUT DRAWINGS OF THE SUPPORTS, ATTACHMENTS, AND BRACING SYSTEMS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
PRE-APPROVED SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL (RDP) IN RESPONSIBLE CHARGE OF THE PROJECT FOR REVIEW TO VERIFY THAT THE DETAILS ARE IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE CODE REQUIREMENTS. THE LAYOUT DRAWINGS SHALL AS MINIMUM SATISFY THE REQUIREMENTS OF ASCE 7 SECTION 13.6 AS MODIFIED BY THE CBC 2022 SECTION 1616A.
1. THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD (SEOR) SHALL VERIFY THAT THE SUPPORTING STRUCTURE IS ADEQUATE
FOR THE FORCES IMPOSED ON IT BY THE SUPPORTS, ATTACHMENTS, AND BRACES INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PRE-APPROVAL IN ADDITION TO ALL OTHER LOADS.
2. THE SEOR SHALL FORWARD THE SUPPORTS, ATTACHMENTS, AND BRACING DRAWINGS (INCLUDED APPROVED
AMENDED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FOR SUPPLEMENTARY FRAMING WHERE REQUIRED) TO THE DISCIPLINE IN
RESPONSIBLE CHARGE WITH A NOTATION INDICATING THAT THE DRAWINGS HAVE BEEN REVIEWED AND ARE IN GENERAL CONFORMANCE WITH THE PRE-APPROVAL IN ADDITION TO ALL OTHER LOADS.
3. A “SHOP DRAWING STAMP” MAY BE USED TO INDICATE COMPLIANCE WITH THIS REQUIREMENT.
4. THE REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL (RDP), OTHER THAN SEOR, MAY PROVIDE THE SHOP DRAWING.
B. THE SEOR SHALL DESIGN ANY SUPPLEMENTARY FRAMING THAT IS NEEDED TO RESIST THE LOADS, MAINTAIN STABILITY AND/OR IS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION OF PRE-APPROVED SYSTEM. · THE SUPPLEMENTARY FRAMING SHALL BE SUBMITTED AS AN AMENDED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS (ACD).
C.THE LAYOUT DRAWINGS (WITH THE SHOP DRAWING STAMP) SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW:
1. STRUCTURE SUPPORTING THE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM HAS ADEQUATE CAPACITY,
2. SEISMIC DESIGN FORCES (FP) ARE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CBC 2022 D. THE LAYOUT DRAWINGS (WITH THE SHOP DRAWING STAMP) SHALL BE KEPT ON THE JOBSITE AND CAN THEN BE USED FOR INSTALLATION OF THE SUPPORT AND BRACING.
E. A COPY OF THE CHOSEN BRACING SYSTEM(S) INSTALLATION GUIDE/OPM MANUAL SHALL BE ON THE JOBSITE PRIOR TO STARTING THE INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND/OR BRACES.
· IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO OBTAIN COPIES OF OPM AND FURNISH THE IOR WITH ONE COPY EACH.
F. COMPONENTS OF TWO OR MORE PRE-APPROVED BRACING SYSTEMS SHALL NOT BE MIXED. · ONLY ONE PRE-APPROVED BRACING SYSTEM MAY BE USED FOR A RUN OF PIPE, DUCT, OR CONDUIT. · ANY SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENT OF AN OPM SYSTEM SHALL REQUIRE REVIEW AND APPROVAL. (2022 CAC SECTIONS 7-115, 7-126, 7-153, AND CBC 2022 SECTION 107)
1. MINIMUM OF 50% OF NON HAZARDOUS CONSTRUCTION WASTE IS TO BE RECYCLE. CGC 5.713.8.1.
2. TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF NEW SYSTEMS SHALL COMPLY AS OUTLINED IN CGC SECTION 5.713.10.4.2.
3. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (O&M) AS LISTED IN CGC SECTION 5.713.10.4.5 SHALL BE DELIVERED TO THE BUILDING OWNER OR REPRESENTATIVE AND THE FACILITIES OPERATOR.
4. DURING CONSTRUCTION, ENDS OF DUCT OPENING SHALL BE SEALED, AND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE COVERED.
CGC 5.714.4.3.
5. VOC'S MUST COMPLY WITH THE LIMITATIONS LISTED IN SECTION 5.504.4 AND TABLES 4.504.1, 5.504.4.1, 5.504.4.2, 5.504.4.3 AND 5.504.4.5 FOR: ADHESIVES, SEALANTS, PAINTS, AND COATINGS, CARPET AND COMPOSITION WOOD PRODUCTS. CGC
5.714.4.4 .
6. PRIOR TO FINAL APPROVAL OF THE BUILDING THE LICENSED CONTRACTOR, ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER IN RESPONSIBLE
CHARGE OF THE OVERALL CONSTRUCTION MUST COMPLETE AND SIGN THE COUNTY APPROVED GREEN BUILDING
STANDARDS CERTIFICATION FORM OR OTHER DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED BY THE COUNTY AND GIVEN TO THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT OFFICIAL PRIOR TO BUILDING FINAL APPROVAL TO BE FILED WITH THE APPROVED PLANS.
SEISMIC BRACING
CALGREEN BUILDING STANDARD NOTES
POINT OF DISCONNECTP.O.D.
POINT OF CONNECTIONP.O.C.
DUCT LEAKAGE TEST CMC 603.10.1
DUCTWORK SHALL BE LEAK-TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SMACNA HVAC AIR DUCT LEAKAGE TEST MANUAL. REPRESENTATIVE SECTIONS TOTALING NOT LESS THAN 10 PERCENT OF THE TOTAL INSTALLED DUCT AREA SHALL BE TESTED. WHERE THE TESTED 10 PERCENT FAIL TO COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION, THEN 40 PERCENT OF THE TOTAL INSTALLED DUCT AREA SHALL BE TESTED. WHERE THE 40 PERCENT FAIL TO COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION, THEN 100 PERCENT OF THE TOTAL INSTALLED DUCT AREA SHALL BE TESTED. SECTIONS SHALL BE SELECTED BY THE BUILDING OWNER OR DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE OF THE BUILDING OWNER. POSITIVE PRESSURE LEAKAGE TESTING SHALL BE PERMITTED FOR NEGATIVE PRESSURE DUCTWORK.
FS
XX
YYEQUIPMENT TAG
U/G UNDER GROUND
THERMOSTAT / TEMPERATURE SENSORT
CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORCO2
1. THE TOTAL SYSTEM AIR BALANCE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY AN INDEPENDENT AGENCY CERTIFIED BY THE AABC. THIS WORK SHALL CONFORM TO AABC SPECIFICATIONS AS REFERRED TO IN THE AABC NATIONAL STANDARDS.
AIR BALANCE NOTES
APPLICABLE CODES
2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS ADMINISTRATIVE CODE, (TITLE 24 PART 1) 2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE (CBC), (TITLE 24 PART 2)
2022 CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE (CEC), (TITLE 24 PART 3) 2022 CALIFORNIA MECHANICAL CODE (CMC), (TITLE 24 PART4) 2022 CALIFORNIA PLUMBING CODE (CPC), (TITLE 24 PART 5)
2022 CALIFORNIA ENERGY CODE, (TITLE 24 PART 6)
2022 CALIFORNIA FIRE CODE (TITLE 24 PART 9)
2022 CALIFORNIA GREEN BUILDING CODE (CGBC), (TITLE 24 11)
SCOPE OF WORK
MBTUH THOUSAND BRITISH THERMAL UNITS PER HOUR
PRESS PRESSURE
SQ FT SQUARE FEET
1. REPLACE THE EXISTING SUPPLY AIR UNIT WITH NEW SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP FAN COIL UNIT COMPLETEWITH MATCHING CONDENSING UNIT, 100% OUTSIDE AIR ECONOMIZER AND BAROMETRIC RELIEF AND NEW LOCAL PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL.
SHEET INDEX
M-001 1
SCHEDULES M-002
S.No.SHEET TITLE
M-101 DEMOLITION PLANS
M-201 PROPOSED PLANS
M-501 DETAILS
NOTES, LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS
SHEET
NUMBER
2 3
4 5
6 SCALE
NO SCALE
NO SCALE
AS SHOWN
AS SHOWN
NO SCALE
M-701 TITLE 24 DOCUMENTATIONNO SCALE
M-301 ELEVATION VIEW
7 1/4" = 1'-0"
RJ
SS
DS
HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC
DRAFT IMPROVEMENT PLANS - CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISMENT HERITAGE HALL HVAC 30% CD 04/02/24 --
3096 HARDING STREET, CARLSBAD, CA 92008
90% CD 05/10/24 --
1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130
IRVINE, CA. 92606
TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800
IDS
IDS GROUP
Project # 22X006.03
PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/11/24 --
19 No. 30841REM
SATTE
ETER SIG
ER
P
D
LO A
C N
F HO C
A
AL I
F C
ANR
I
O
EFO
ISS
NER ENI GELANI
DARREN
B
. SMITH
Exp. 12/31/24
NOTES LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS
M-001
02 P L A N R E V I E W A P P R O V A L
THESE PLANS/DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN
REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS
CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA AND AMENDED BY THE
JURISDICTION. PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF
DOCUMENTS DOES NOT AUTHORIZE
CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF
ANY FEDERAL, STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.
BY: _________________ DATE: ________________
True North Compliance Services, Inc.
THIS SET OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MUST BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES
AND IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE ANY CHANGES OR
ALTERATIONS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM THE
CITY. OCCUPANCY OF STRUCTURE(S) IS NOT
PERMITTED UNTIL FINAL APPROVAL IS GRANTED
BY ALL APPLICABLE DEPARTMENTS.
Ali Al-Murshid
10/25/24
CBC2024-0329_PLANS_V1 11/6/24
COMPRESSORS SHALL BE INVERTER-DRIVEN. SINGLE-SPEED COMPRESSOR IS NOT ACCEPTABLE.1 2 3
4 MCA
BASIS OF DESIGN
INDOOR UNIT(S)
SEER2 HSPF2
SERVING
NOMINAL
REMARKS:PROVIDE 7-YEAR COMPRESSOR AND 5-YEAR PART WARRANTY AT NO EXTRA COST TO OWNER.
VOLTAGE
UNIT TAGMANUFACTURER
AND MODEL NO.
MATCHED WITH
LOCATION
SYSTEM (DUCTED FAN COIL)
AHRI EFFICIENCY NOM. COOLING
CAPACITY @ ARI
CONDITIONS
REMARKS:
MOCP
TONS COOLING
5 OUTDOOR HEAT PUMP UNIT
MOUNTING
DETAIL
COOLING
CAPACITY
(BTUH) & MODEL NO.
MANUFACTURER
MCA
UNIT POWER
VOLTAGE
PIPE SIZE
REFRIGERANT
MOCP
OSA CFM
DCV MAX
DCV MIN
NOMINAL
CAPACITY
(TONS)
UNIT TAG
DESIGN
AIRFLOW
(CFM)FLA
SERVING:
1 REMARKS
HEATING
CAPACITY
(BTUH)
VRF INDOOR FAN COIL UNIT
MOUNTING
DETAIL
FAN COIL UNIT
DIMENSIONS
W" x D" x H" " WG.
ESPECM
FAN
MOTORSUCTIONLIQUID
MIXING BOX
TOTAL
OPER. WT.
(LBS.)
SOUND
DATA
dBA
STATUS
PROVIDE MICROMETL MIXING BOX (ECONOMIZER) COMPLETE WITH HONEYWELL ACTUATOR,
HONEYWELL JADE ECONOMIZER / DCV CONTROLLER, OUTSIDE AND RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE SENSORS, COMPATIBLE FOR 2-SPEED SUPPLY FAN OPERATION. FURNISH ECONOMIZER WITH
HONEYWELL JADE CONTROLLER COMPATIBLE FOR UNITS WITH AND WITHOUT DEMAND CONTROL VENTILATION AND 2-SPEED SUPPLY FAN. FURNISH WITH ECONOMIZER FAULT DETECTION AND DIAGNOSTICS. PROVIDE THE SERVICE OF AC UNIT FACTORY TECHNICIAN TO TEST, ADJUST, AND START UP EACH AC UNIT AND ITS ECONOMIZER. THE FACTORY TECHNICIAN WORKING WITH THE
TEST AND BALANCE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT A START-UP REPORT FOR EACH UNIT
CERTIFYING THAT THE UNIT IS FULLY FUNCTIONAL AND HAS BEEN SET TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE FACTORY AND THIS PROJECT.
HP
1 TOSHIBA / CARRIER
MCY-MAP0487HS-UL
(HEAT PUMP)
ON GRADE48,000
BTUH
54,000
BTUH17.29.53 1 2456
1 M-501
FC
1 TOSHIBA/CARRIER
MMD-UP0481BHP-UL4.0NEW1,1770.8 250 W.48,000 54,0002.85 3.56 15.05/8"3/8"56x30x1193+100 = 193471234
POWER AND CONTROL WIRING SHALL BE PER MANUFACTURER'S
RECOMMENDATIONS. REFER TO POWER AND WIRING SCHEMATICS.
REFRIGERANT PIPING ROUTING SHALL BE FINALIZED BY A CERTIFIED TOSHIBA/CARRIER VRF INSTALLER / CONTRACTOR. SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS.
5 -
-
PROVIDE MERV 13 FILTERS.
REFRIGERANT PIPING ROUTING SHALL BE FINALIZED BY A CERTIFIED TOSHIBA - CARRIER VRF INSTALLER / CONTRACTOR. SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS.
PROVIDE COIL AND CABINET COATING FOR COASTAL ENVIRONMENT INSTALLATION.
PROVIDE DEMAND CONTROL VENTILATION (VIA HONEYWELL JADE CONTROLLER). PROVIDE AND MOUNT DCV-CO2 SENSOR IN CONDITIONED SPACE AT 4'-6" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AND WIRE TO JADE CONTROLLER.
PROVIDE 7-DAY PROGRAMMABLE, WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER.
PROVIDE CONDENSATE OVERFLOW SWITCH AND ALARM.
2 3
4 5
NOM. HEATING
CAPACITY @ ARI
CONDITIONS
OPERATING
WEIGHT (LBS.)
EA. MODULE
DIMENSIONS
W" x D" x H" STATUS
TYPE
REFRIGERANT
R-410A
TYPE
REFRIGERANT
R-410A
1 S-502
HP-1
COUPLED
WITH
OUTDOOR
UNIT
6 6
REMARKS MFR.
MODEL SYMBOLLOCATION TYPESERVICE
PERFORMANCE PHYSICAL
CFMDIA
(IN.)
WEIGHT
(LBS)
SP
" WG
1. ALUMINUM HOOD
2. COUNTER BALANCE BACKDRAFT DAMPER.
REMARKS
GI
1 GREENHECK
GRSI-24
ROOF38.2550 0.1 2354
3. INSECT SCREEN
4. 12" HIGH FACTORY ROOF CURB
GRAVITY INTAKE / RELIEF HOOD
H
(IN.)
35 OSA INTAKE
VENTILATOR
OSA INTAKE
FOR FC-3 AND FC-4
1, 2, 3, 4
ANCHORAGE
DETAIL
5 M-501
GR
1 GREENHECK
GRSR-24
ROOF38.2550 0.1 235435 GRAVITY RELIEF
VENTILATOR
RELIEF AIR FOR AREA SERVED
BY FC-1 AND FC-2
1, 2, 3, 4 5
M-501
GR
2 GREENHECK
GRSR-24
ROOF38.2550 0.1 235435 GRAVITY RELIEF
VENTILATOR
RELIEF AIR FOR AREA SERVED
BY FC-3 AND FC-4
1, 2, 3, 4 5
M-501
PROVIDE COIL AND CABINET COATING FOR COASTAL ENVIRONMENT INSTALLATION.6 FC-1 NEW 4.0208-230 / 1 / 60
ELECTRICAL
36.34039.8 x 14.6 x 61.0311
HP
2 TOSHIBA / CARRIER
MCY-MAP0487HS-UL
(HEAT PUMP)
ON GRADE48,000
BTUH
54,000
BTUH17.29.53 1 2456
1 M-501
R-410A FC-2 NEW 4.0208-230 / 1 / 60 36.34039.8 x 14.6 x 61.0311 HP
3 TOSHIBA / CARRIER
MCY-MAP0487HS-UL
(HEAT PUMP)
ON GRADE48,000
BTUH
54,000
BTUH17.29.53 1 2456
1 M-501
R-410A FC-3 NEW 4.0208-230 / 1 / 6036.34039.8 x 14.6 x 61.0311 HP
4 TOSHIBA / CARRIER
MCY-MAP0487HS-UL
(HEAT PUMP)
ON GRADE48,000
BTUH
54,000
BTUH17.29.53 1 2456
1 M-501
R-410A FC-4 NEW 4.0208-230 / 1 / 6036.34039.8 x 14.6 x 61.0311
AUDITORIUM
SOUTH
AUDITORIUM
SOUTH
AUDITORIUM
NORTH & STAGE
AUDITORIUM
NORTH & STAGE
PROVIDE SEPARATE POWER AND FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH TO
EACH OUTDOOR UNIT - BY ELECTRICAL DIV. 26.
208-230 / 1 / 60
FC
2 TOSHIBA/CARRIER
MMD-UP0481BHP-UL4.0NEW1,1770.8 250 W.48,000 54,0002.85 3.56 15.05/8"3/8"56x30x114712345 - -
R-410A
1 S-502
HP-26 208-230 / 1 / 60
FC
3 TOSHIBA/CARRIER
MMD-UP0481BHP-UL4.0NEW1,1770.8 250 W.48,000 54,0002.85 3.56 15.05/8"3/8"56x30x114712345 - -
R-410A
1 S-502
HP-36 208-230 / 1 / 60
FC
4 TOSHIBA/CARRIER
MMD-UP0481BHP-UL4.0NEW1,1770.8 250 W.48,000 54,0002.85 3.56 15.05/8"3/8"56x30x114712345 - -
R-410A
1 S-502
HP-46 208-230 / 1 / 60
AUDITORIUM
SOUTH
AUDITORIUM
SOUTH
AUDITORIUM
NORTH & STAGE
AUDITORIUM
NORTH & STAGE
MICROMETL
MB-VTSB4CA-DJDH
93+100 =
193
MICROMETL
MB-VTSB4CA-DJDH
93+100 =
193
MICROMETL
MB-VTSB4CA-DJDH
93+100 =
193
MICROMETL
MB-VTSB4CA-DJDH
7 7
7 7
7 RJ
SS
DS
HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC
DRAFT IMPROVEMENT PLANS - CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISMENT HERITAGE HALL HVAC 30% CD 04/02/24 --
3096 HARDING STREET, CARLSBAD, CA 92008
90% CD 05/10/24 --
1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130
IRVINE, CA. 92606
TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800
IDS
IDS GROUP
Project # 22X006.03
PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/11/24 --
19 No. 30841REM
SATTE
ETER SIG
ER
P
D
LO A
C N
F HO C
A
AL I
F C
ANR
I
O
EFO
ISS
NER ENI GELANI
DARREN
B
. SMITH
Exp. 12/31/24
SCHEDULES
M-002
03 P L A N R E V I E W A P P R O V A L
THESE PLANS/DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN
REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS
CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA AND AMENDED BY THE
JURISDICTION. PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF
DOCUMENTS DOES NOT AUTHORIZE
CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF
ANY FEDERAL, STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.
BY: _________________ DATE: ________________
True North Compliance Services, Inc.
THIS SET OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MUST BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES
AND IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE ANY CHANGES OR
ALTERATIONS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM THE
CITY. OCCUPANCY OF STRUCTURE(S) IS NOT
PERMITTED UNTIL FINAL APPROVAL IS GRANTED
BY ALL APPLICABLE DEPARTMENTS.
Ali Al-Murshid
10/25/24
CBC2024-0329_PLANS_V1 11/6/24
DEMOLITION KEYNOTES
(E) EXHAUST FAN TO REMAIN AND REUSED.
(E) GAS FIRED, FAN POWERED UNIT HEATER TO
REMAIN AND REUSED.
(E) THERMOSTAT TO REMAIN AND REUSED.
(E) MAKEUP GRILLE TO REMAIN AND REUSED.
DEMOLISH AND REMOVE (E) FAN COIL UNIT
INCLUDING ALL APPURTENANCES.
DEMOLISH AND REMOVE (E) DUCTWORK AS
INDICATED.
(E) 72X48 OSA LOUVER TO REMAIN AND REUSED.
(E) RETURN AIR GRILLE FOR FAN POWER HEATER
TO REMAIN AND REUSED.
NOT USED.
DEMOLISH AND REMOVE EXISTING THERMOSTAT.
DEMOLISH AND REMOVE (E) EXHAUST FAN AND
CURB AT ROOF. REUSE EXISTING OPENING.
DEMOLISH AND REMOVE (E) GRILLE. REUSE
EXISTING OPENING.
1 STAGE
CLOSET
STAIRS
CLOSET
LANDING
& STEPS
TO STAGE
LANDING
& STEPS
TO STAGE
STORAGE
FPH
LIMIT OF SECOND FLOOR ABOVE.
SEE 2 / M101
(E) EF(E) EF
EF
(E) EF
(E) EF ON
ROOF
(E) EF ON
ROOF
(E) EF
2 3 11 11
11 1
1 2
3 10
4 4
4 (E)VTR
5 6
7 (E) FPH
8 8
9 FCU
10 LOBBY
VESTIBULE
WOMEN
MEN
MULTI USE
DRESS 1DRESS 2
T
S
T
11 12
(E)WALKWAY
REMOVE (E) PLANTER FOR (N)
OUTDOOR HEAT PUMP UNIT
REMOVE (E) PLANTER FOR (N)
OUTDOOR HEAT PUMP UNIT
(E) WATER METER
(E) GAS METER
(E) 2"FP(E) 1-1/2"FP
(E) 2"FP
(E) 1"FP
(E) 1"FP
(E) 1"FP
(E) 1"FP(E) 1"FP
(E) 1"FP
(E) 1"FP
(E) 1"FP
(E) 1"FP
(E) 1" DRAIN VALVE 6"
ABOVE GRADE
MECHANICAL
STORAGE
CLOSET
STAIRS
2 (E)33x25(L)
(E)23x25(L)
(E)33x25(L)
(E)FCU
(E)VTR
EF
(E)13.5x7.5 GRILLE
(E) EF ON
ROOF
11 5
3 7
(E) FPH
6 12 12
FPH
(E)48x24 GRILLE
(E) 4000 CFM
(E)48x24 GRILLE
(E) 4000 CFM
(E)23x25(L)
T
S
6 6
6 (E)FP PIPE DN.
RJ
SS
DS
HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC
DRAFT IMPROVEMENT PLANS - CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISMENT HERITAGE HALL HVAC 30% CD 04/02/24 --
3096 HARDING STREET, CARLSBAD, CA 92008
90% CD 05/10/24 --
1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130
IRVINE, CA. 92606
TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800
IDS
IDS GROUP
Project # 22X006.03
PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/11/24 --
19 No. 30841REM
SATTE
ETER SIG
ER
P
D
LO A
C N
F HO C
A
AL I
F C
ANR
I
O
EFO
ISS
NER ENI GELANI
DARREN
B
. SMITH
Exp. 12/31/24
1 1/8"=1'-0" FIRST FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN 2 1/4"=1'-0" ENLARGED SECOND FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN TRUE
NORTH
N
DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN
M-101
04 P L A N R E V I E W A P P R O V A L
THESE PLANS/DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN
REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS
CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA AND AMENDED BY THE
JURISDICTION. PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF
DOCUMENTS DOES NOT AUTHORIZE
CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF
ANY FEDERAL, STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.
BY: _________________ DATE: ________________
True North Compliance Services, Inc.
THIS SET OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MUST BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES
AND IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE ANY CHANGES OR
ALTERATIONS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM THE
CITY. OCCUPANCY OF STRUCTURE(S) IS NOT
PERMITTED UNTIL FINAL APPROVAL IS GRANTED
BY ALL APPLICABLE DEPARTMENTS.
Ali Al-Murshid
10/25/24
CBC2024-0329_PLANS_V1 11/6/24
KEYNOTES
1 T
S
LIMIT OF SECOND FLOOR ABOVE.
SEE 2/M-201
3 M201
STAGE
CLOSET
STAIRS
CLOSET
LANDING
& STEPS
TO STAGE
LANDING
& STEPS
TO STAGE
STORAGE
LOBBY
VESTIBULE
WOMEN MEN
MULTI USE
DRESS 1
DRESS 2
(E) EXHAUST FAN TO REMAIN AND REUSED.
(E) GAS FIRED, FAN POWERED UNIT HEATER TO
REMAIN AND REUSED.
(E) THERMOSTAT TO REMAIN AND REUSED.
(E) MAKEUP GRILLE TO REMAIN AND REUSED.
(E) 72x48 OSA LOUVER TO REMAIN AND REUSED.
(E) RETURN AIR GRILLE FOR FAN POWER HEATER
TO REMAIN AND REUSED.
(E) DUCTWORK TO REMAIN AND REUSED.
22x22 OSA DUCT UP TO GRAVITY INTAKE HOOD AT
ROOF. REUSE EXISTING OPENING.
22x22 RELIEF DUCT UP TO GRAVITY RELIEF HOOD
AT ROOF. REUSE EXISTING OPENING.
EQUIPMENT SERVICE CLEARANCE
2 3
4 5
6 7
(E) EF
(E) EF
1 4
4 1
(N) CONC. PAD
HP
1 8
9 FC-1
FC-2 CO2T
CO2T
10 1
M301
HP
2 HP
3 HP
4 (E) WALKWAY
(N) FENCE ENCLOSURE WITH
ACCESS GATES
T CO2
CO2T
(E) WATER METER
(E) GAS METER
3/4" CD FROM DAN COILS ABV.
CONNECT TO TAIL PIECE OF
LAV. SEE DETAIL 8/M-501
(N) REFRIGERANT LINES ON
EXTERIOR WALL
(N) REFRIGERANT LINES ON
EXTERIOR WALL
1. FIRE SPRINKLER NOTES:
FS CONTRACTOR TO RELOCATE EXISTING PIPING
AND FS HEADS AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE
NEW FAN COIL UNITS AND DUCTWORK.
GENERAL NOTES
1 M-202
T
S
MECHANICAL
STORAGE
CLOSET
STAIRS
(E)VTR
(E) FPH
FPH
5 2
3 24x20(1"L) RA
FC
2 RG
2254
10 GR
1 AT ROOF
9MD
SG
1177
48x24
SG
1077
48x24
SG
100
-
8x6
22x18 OSA
22x18 OSA
ABOVE
24x20(1"L) RA
BELOW
RG
2354
10 AT HIGH
LEVEL
FC
1 2354 CFM
3/4" CD DOWN
TO TAIL PIECE
OF LAV BELOW
T
S
STAGE
LANDING
& STEPS
TO STAGE
LANDING
& STEPS
TO STAGE
1 1
EF
2 (E) FPH
FPH
(E)VTR
3 (E) EF (E) EF
6 GI
1 AT ROOF
GR
2 AT ROOF
RG
2350
SG
1177
8 9
CO2T
FC-3
FC-4
AT HIGH LEVEL
18"Ø(L)
18"Ø(L)
20"x18" OSA
16"Ø OSA
FC
4 10
RG
1177
T CO2
(N) REFRIGERANT
LINES ON
EXTERIOR WALL
SG
1177
10 DRYWELL FOR
CONDENSATE DRAIN
FC
3 RG
1177
20"x18"
20"x18"
AT BOTTOM OF
THE UNIT
AT BOTTOM OF
THE UNIT
4x12 BEAM AT 12'-1" A.F.F.
JOIST AT 9'-9" A.F.F.
(TYP.4)
UNIT AT 13'-6" A.F.F.
(TYP.2)
(E) SPEAKER
1 M-202
STORAGE
1"CD
3/4"CD
3/4"CD
RJ
SS
DS
HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC
DRAFT IMPROVEMENT PLANS - CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISMENT HERITAGE HALL HVAC 30% CD 04/02/24 --
3096 HARDING STREET, CARLSBAD, CA 92008
90% CD 05/10/24 --
1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130
IRVINE, CA. 92606
TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800
IDS
IDS GROUP
Project # 22X006.03
PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/11/24 --
19 No. 30841REM
SATTE
ETER SIG
ER
P
D
LO A
C N
F HO C
A
AL I
F C
ANR
I
O
EFO
ISS
NER ENI GELANI
DARREN
B
. SMITH
Exp. 12/31/24
1 1/8"=1'-0" FIRST FLOOR PROPOSED PLAN 2 1/4"=1'-0" ENLARGED SECOND FLOOR PROPOSED PLAN TRUE
NORTH
N
3 1/4"=1'-0" ENLARGED FIRST FLOOR PROPOSED PLAN
PROPOSED FLOOR PLAN
M-201
05 P L A N R E V I E W A P P R O V A L
THESE PLANS/DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN
REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS
CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA AND AMENDED BY THE
JURISDICTION. PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF
DOCUMENTS DOES NOT AUTHORIZE
CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF
ANY FEDERAL, STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.
BY: _________________ DATE: ________________
True North Compliance Services, Inc.
THIS SET OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MUST BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES
AND IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE ANY CHANGES OR
ALTERATIONS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM THE
CITY. OCCUPANCY OF STRUCTURE(S) IS NOT
PERMITTED UNTIL FINAL APPROVAL IS GRANTED
BY ALL APPLICABLE DEPARTMENTS.
Ali Al-Murshid
10/25/24
CBC2024-0329_PLANS_V1 11/6/24
18'-11"
14'-6"
12'-1"
4x12 BEAM AT 12'-1" A.F.F.
JOIST AT 9'-9" A.F.F.
(TYP.4)
13'-6"
16"Ø OSA
20"x18" OSA
GI
1 GR
2 FC
4 FC
3 F.F.L
11"
RJ
SS
DS
HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC
DRAFT IMPROVEMENT PLANS - CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISMENT HERITAGE HALL HVAC 30% CD 04/02/24 --
3096 HARDING STREET, CARLSBAD, CA 92008
90% CD 05/10/24 --
1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130
IRVINE, CA. 92606
TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800
IDS
IDS GROUP
Project # 22X006.03
PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/11/24 --
19 No. 30841REM
SATTE
ETER SIG
ER
P
D
LO A
C N
F HO C
A
AL I
F C
ANR
I
O
EFO
ISS
NER ENI GELANI
DARREN
B
. SMITH
Exp. 12/31/24
1 1/4"=1'-0" SECTION
SECTION
M-202
06 P L A N R E V I E W A P P R O V A L
THESE PLANS/DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN
REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS
CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA AND AMENDED BY THE
JURISDICTION. PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF
DOCUMENTS DOES NOT AUTHORIZE
CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF
ANY FEDERAL, STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.
BY: _________________ DATE: ________________
True North Compliance Services, Inc.
THIS SET OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MUST BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES
AND IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE ANY CHANGES OR
ALTERATIONS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM THE
CITY. OCCUPANCY OF STRUCTURE(S) IS NOT
PERMITTED UNTIL FINAL APPROVAL IS GRANTED
BY ALL APPLICABLE DEPARTMENTS.
Ali Al-Murshid
10/25/24
CBC2024-0329_PLANS_V1 11/6/24
1 1/4"=1'-0" PARTIAL ELEVATION - NORTH
HP
1 6" 5'-1"
(N) CONC. CURB
PERMANENTLY LOCK THE
(E) OPERABLE WINDOW.
(E) GRADE
HP
2 HP
3 HP
4 1
PC
CUSTOMER LOCAL AREA NETWORK
HERITAGE HALL
LOCAL AREA NETWORK
042007DB
WIRE LEGEND
BACNET MS/TP NETWORK WIRING
BURIAL BACNET MS/TP NETWORK WIRING
042002-S
PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS
24 AWG 2 COND SHIELDED, PLENUM, ORANGE
24 AWG 2 COND SHIELDED, BURIAL, BLACK
LINE STYLEWIRE TYPEPART NUMBERDESCRIPTION
I/O NETWORK WIRING043009AL 22 AWG 2 COND SHIELDED, PLENUM, BLUE VRF NETWORK WIRING001320-S 16 AWG 2 COND SHIELDED, PLENUM, WHITE 1 WS
1 NR
GS1S2I/O
1 CP
120VACE
2 CP
BT485
NETWORK TOPOLOGY MAY VARY BASED UPON FIELD CONDITIONS
1 VRF
1 HP
U3/U4LAN
1 FC
2 HP
2 FC
3 HP
3 FC
U1/U2
4 HP
U3/U4U1/U2
4 FC
U1/U2
RA
OASA
A
24 VAC
BACNET MS/TP CARRIER NATIVE BACNET CONTROLLER
N.O.
N.C.
VRF INDOOR FAN COIL
D
X
2 SARA
UNIT HEATER
×
×
×
×
TOTALS
VRF BACNET GATEWAY POINTS
HARDWARE POINTSSOFTWARE POINTS POINT NAME
AI AO BI BO AV BV SCHED TREND ALARM
SPACE TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
SUPPLY FAN COMMAND
SUPPLY FAN SPEED STATUS
0 0 0 0 11 0 1 2 6 12
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
INDOOR UNIT MALFUNCTION CODE
OUTDOOR UNIT COMPRESSOR SPEED
×
×
×
×
×
SCHEDULE× ×
INDOOR UNIT MODE STATUS
× ×
×
× × OUTDOOR UNIT MODE STATUS
×
OUTDOOR UNIT MALFUNCTION CODE× ××
× × INDOOR UNIT MODE COMMAND
TEMPERATURE SETPOINT STATUS× ××
ONE
OUTSIDE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR PER
SITE
OAT (BACNET)
OVER THE
NETWORKCO2 (RNET)
TEMP (RNET)
SF S/S
(BO)
SF
STAT
(BI)
HEAT
(DO)
SAT
(AI)
SPACE
SENSOR
MAD
(AO)
CONTROLS PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY RUSSELL SIGLER INC CONTROLS GROUP CONTROL PANEL SHALL CONFORM TO UL 508A STANDARDS
SHOW ON
GRAPHIC
BACNET MSTP NETWORK GUIDELINES:
A MSTP NETWORK SHALL NOT EXCEED 10,000 FEET OVERALL LENGTH, CONSISTING OF UP TO FIVE 2000 FOOT SEGMENTS WITH NO GREATER THAN 30 DEVICES PER SEGMENT.
EACH 2000 FOOT SEGMENT SHALL BE JOINED TO THE NEXT SEGMENT USING A BACNET REPEATER WITH APPROPRIATE TERMINATION. NO MORE THAN 4 REPEATERS CAN BE USED ON A SINGLE BACNET MSTP NETWORK.
EACH SEGMENT WILL HAVE TERMINATION AT THE BEGINNING AND END OF THE SEGMENT.
VRF
FANCOIL
UNIT
VRF
FANCOIL
UNIT
U1/U2
VRF
FANCOIL
UNIT
U1/U2
VRF
FANCOIL
UNIT
VRF
CONDENSING
UNIT
U3/U4U1/U2
VRF
CONDENSING
UNIT
U3/U4U1/U2
VRF
CONDENSING
UNIT
U3/U4U1/U2
VRF
CONDENSING
UNIT
VRF
GATEWAY
CONTROL
PANEL
LOCATION TO BE
FIELD VERIFIED
LOCATION TO BE
FIELD VERIFIED
LOCATION TO BE
FIELD VERIFIED
120VACE 120VACE
TRUVU
ROUTER
CONTROL
PANEL
NEW I-VU PRO WEB SERVER
LOCATION TO BE FIELD
VERIFIED
ANY PC OR INTERNET DEVICE WITH
STANDARD WEB BROWSER SOFTWARE AND
LAN ACCESS, SUPPLED BY OTHERS
1.0SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
1.1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR (HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC)
1.1.1 ECONOMIZER CONTROLLER (DCV)
ECONOMIZER
ECONOMIZER SHALL CLOSE WHEN FAN IS OFF OR DURING A LOSS OF POWER. DURING OCCUPIED HOURS, WHEN FAN IS ENERGIZED, THE ECONOMIZER SHALL OPEN TO ADJUSTABLE MINIMUM POSITION. WHEN
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE IS BELOW SPACE TEMPERATURE AND OCCUPIED SPACE REQUIRES COOLING, ECONOMIZER SHALL OPEN. IF ECONOMIZER AIR IS NOT SUFFICIENT TO MEET THE DEMAND IN THE
OCCUPIED SPACE, UNIT SHALL ENABLE AVAILABLE COOLING STAGES TO SATISFY DEMAND IN THE OCCUPIED SPACE.
CO2 CONTROL
UNIT SHALL MONITOR SPACE CO2 WHEN THE SUPPLY FAN IS ENERGIZED. WHEN CO2 IS ABOVE SETPOINT, ECONOMIZER SHALL MODULATE OPEN TOWARD AN ADJUSTABLE MAXIMUM CO2 POSITION. AS THE CO2
LEVEL IN THE SPACE INCREASES ABOVE THE SETPOINT, THE MINIMUM POSITIONS OF THE DAMPERS WILL BE INCREASED PROPORTIONALLY, UNTIL THE MAXIMUM VENTILATION SETTING IS REACHED. AS THE SPACE CO2 LEVEL DECREASES BECAUSE OF THE INCREASE IN FRESH AIR, THE OUTDOOR-DAMPER WILL FOLLOW THE HIGHER DEMAND CONDITION FROM THE DCV MODE OR FROM THE FREE-COOLING MODE.
1.1.2 UNIT HEATER CONTROLLER (HEATING)
GENERAL
EACH UNIT HEATER SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR HEATING THE SPACE TO MAINTAIN SETPOINT TEMPERATURES.
OCCUPIED MODE
THE RTUC SHALL BE INDEXED TO OCCUPIED BY ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVENTS:
·A THERMOSTAT ACTIVATES THE UNIT HEATERS INDOOR FAN INPUT POINT. ·A TIMED OVERRIDE MAY BE INITIATED BY THE OPERATOR FROM CENTRAL NETWORK SOFTWARE, OR BY A ZONE OCCUPANT PUSHING THE OVERRIDE BUTTON ON A ZONE SENSOR. A TIMED OVERRIDE SHALL EXTEND THE OCCUPIED SCHEDULE FROM 1 TO 4 HOURS (USER ADJUSTABLE).
INDOOR FAN OPERATION
WHEN INDEXED TO OCCUPIED AND IN CALL FOR HEAT, THE UNIT HEATER SHALL START AND RUN THE INDOOR FAN CONTINUOUSLY. WHEN THE UNIT HEATER HAS BEEN INDEXED TO UNOCCUPIED OR NO COOL FOR HEAT, THE RTUC SHALL STOP THE INDOOR FAN. THE FAN SHALL BE RESTARTED AND RUN DURING THE UNOCCUPIED MODE IF:
·THE SPACE TEMPERATURE DRIFTS OUTSIDE THE UNOCCUPIED SETPOINTS.
OCCUPIED HEATING
OCCUPIED HEATING SHALL BE ESTABLISHED IF THE RTUC IS INDEXED TO OCCUPIED, AND THE RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE IS BELOW THE OCCUPIED HEATING SETPOINT TEMPERATURE. WITH THE INDOOR FAN
RUNNING, THE RTUC SHALL CLOSE THE OUTDOOR DAMPERS TO THE MINIMUM VENTILATION FLOW RATE OF 20% (ADJUSTABLE), AND STAGE GAS HEAT AS REQUIRED TO BRING THE SPACE TEMPERATURE TO A SETPOINT OF 68 0F (ADJUSTABLE). MINIMUM ON AND OFF TIMERS SHALL PROTECT THE HEAT FROM SHORT CYCLING. AS THE HEATING LOAD DECREASES, THE GAS HEAT STAGES SHALL BE DISABLED WHILE THE INDOOR FAN CONTINUES TO RUN.
1.1.3 VRF FANCOIL INTEGRATION
THE TOSHIBA/ CARRIER VRF FANCOIL UNITS SHALL RUN BASED ON ITS INTERNAL SAFETIES AND CONTROLS. THE BMS FRONT END SHALL INTEGRATE TO THE VRF SYSTEM IN ORDER TO RUN THE FOLLOWING SEQUENCE.
INDOOR FAN
DURING OCCUPIED PERIODS, FAN SHALL OPERATE CONTINUOUSLY. DURING UNOCCUPIED PERIODS, FAN
SHALL OPERATE WHEN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE EXCEEDS THE UNOCCUPIED HEATING OR COOLING SETPOINTS. THE FAN OPERATES AT ONE SPEED ONLY AND PROVIDES ON/OFF OPERATION.
HEATING MODE
WHEN SPACE TEMPERATURE IS BELOW THE OCCUPIED HEATING SETPOINT, UNIT SHALL REQUEST HEATING FROM THE UNIT HEATERS SERVING THE SPACE.
COOLING MODE
WHEN SPACE TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE OCCUPIED COOLING SETPOINT, UNIT SHALL OPERATE IN THE COOLING MODE. UNIT SHALL ENABLE AVAILABLE COOLING STAGES TO SATISFY DEMAND IN THE OCCUPIED SPACE.
ABBREVIATIONDESCRIPTION
ACAIR CONDITIONING
ACUAIR CONDITIONING UNIT
AHUAIR HANDLING UNIT
AIANALOG INPUT
AOANALOG OUTPUT
AUTOAUTOMATIC
AUXAUXILIARY
BAIBACNET ANALOG INPUT
BAOBACNET ANALOG OUTPUT
BBIBACNET BINARY INPUT
BBOBACNET BINARY OUTPUT
BIBINARY INPUT
BOBINARY OUTPUT
CCOMMON
CHWCHILLED WATER
CHWPCHILLED WATER PUMP
CHWRCHILLED WATER RETURN
CHWSCHILLED WATER SUPPLY
CONDCONDENSER
CWCONDENSER WATER
CWPCONDENSER WATER PUMP
CWRCONDENSER WATER RETURN
CWSCONDENSER WATER SUPPLY
DADISCHARGE AIR
DIDIGITAL INPUT
DODIGITAL OUTPUT
EAEXHAUST AIR
EFEXHAUST FAN
EVAPEVAPORATOR
FFAHRENHEIT
FCUFAN COIL UNIT
HOAHAND/OFF/AUTO
HPHEAT PUMP
HRUHEAT RECOVERY UNIT
HTEXHEAT EXCHANGER
HWHOT WATER
HWPHOT WATER PUMP
HWRHOT WATER RETURN
HWSHOT WATER SUPPLY
MAXMAXIMUM
MINMINIMUM
MISCMISCELLANEOUS
NCNORMALLY CLOSED
NONORMALLY OPEN
OAOUTDOOR AIR
RARETURN AIR
RFRETURN FAN
RHRELATIVE HUMIDITY
RTUROOFTOP UNIT
SASUPPLY AIR
SFSUPPLY FAN
SPSTATIC PRESSURE
TEMPTEMPERATURE
UHUNIT HEATER
UVUNIT VENTILATOR
VAVVARIABLE AIR VOLUME
VAVTUVARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL UNIT
VVTVARIABLE VOLUME & TEMPERATURE
W/WITH
W/OWITHOUT
WSHPWATER SOURCE HEAT PUMP
HEATING
H
X
COOLING
D
X
SUPPLY FAN RETURN FAN
+-
HILO
FILTER
HILO
MANUAL
WIRE NUT
A
A A
2-WAY VALVE3-WAY VALVE
COMMUNICATION BUS SPECIFICATION
1. A 24 AWG 2-CONDUCTOR-SHIELDED-STRANDED CABLE (PLENUM RATED AS REQUIRED) MUST BE DAISY CHAINED FROM CONTROLLER TO CONTROLLER.
IT SHOULD BE COLOR CODED (RED, BLACK, WHITE).
2. THE COMMUNICATION CABLE OPERATES AT UP TO 5 VDC. VERIFY WITH THE LOCAL CODE AUTHORITY AND SPECS
REGARDING CONDUIT
REQUIREMENTS.
3. NO "T" TAP OR "STAR" TYPE CONNECTIONS ARE PERMITTED.
4. TERMINATE THE SHIELDS ON THE DESIGNATED TERMINAL AT EACH DEVICE.
5. 30 CONTROLLER’S MAXIMUM PER COMMUNICATION BUS SEGMENT. 60 CONTROLLER’S MAXIMUM PER NETWORK ROUTER.
6. A REPEATER IS REQUIRED EVERY 2000 FT. OR 30 DEVICES. MAXIMUM OF 4 REPEATERS PER BUS FOR A TOTAL OF 10,000 FT.
GENERAL NOTES
1. THE 2 CONDUCTOR COMMUNICATION CABLE AND SENSOR CABLES MUST ALWAYS BE IN A SEPARATE JACKET FROM ONE ANOTHER. NEVER RUN THE
SE CABLES IN THE SAME CONDUIT AS, OR
BUNDLE THEM WITH, AC POWER WIRING OF ANY VOLTAGE. DO NOT STRAP THESE CABLES ALONG ANY CONDUITS THAT CONTAIN AC POWER WIRING OF ANY VOLTAGE.
DO NOT RUN THESE CABLES IN RINGS OR CONDUIT WITH FIRE, LIFE, SAFETY, SECURITY, NETWORK, TELEPHONE, POWER, OR OTHER WIRING. WHEN RUNNING COMMUNICATION AND SENSOR WIRING PARALLEL TO OTHER CABLING OR CONDUIT MAINTAIN A 12 IN. DISTANCE.
2. ETHERNET AND/OR INTERNET CONNECTION TO I-VU ARE SUPPLIED AND MAINTAINED BY BUILDING OWNER/OPERATOR.
INSTALLATION COORDINATION NOTES
1. INSTALLER SHALL COORDINATE ALL POWER AND DATA CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS WITH THE GC ONSITE.
2. INSTALL ALL COMPONENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SPECIFICATION, APPLICABLE CODES AND MANUFACTURER ’S LITERATURE
PUMP
2 NTS SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
3 NTS SYMBOL LEGEND
4 NTS GENERAL INFORMATION
8 NTS BACS RISER DIAGRAM
5 NTS COMMON ABBREVIATIONS
BAROMETRIC
RELIEF
MANUAL
DAMPER
VERTICAL
ECONOMIZER
HORIZONTAL
ECONOMIZER
SPACE
SENSOR ENTHALPY OR HUMIDITY
DIFF. PRESSURE
SENSOR
STATIC
SENSOR
PRESSURE
DUCT TEMP
SENSOR
DOOR
CONTACT
CEILING MOUNT
MOTION SENSOR
WELL TEMP
SENSOR
LIQUID FLOW
METER
LIQUID DIFF
PRESSURE
SENSOR
CONTROLS PROVIDED AND
INSTALLED BY RUSSELL
SIGLER INC CONTROLS
GROUP
7 NTS VRF MIXING BOX & UNIT HEATER - CTRLS DIAG. (FC/HP-1 THRU FC/HP-4, UH-1, & UH-2) 6 NTS VRF FANCOIL UNITS - 3RD PARTY INTEGRATION POINTS
RJ
SS
DS
HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC
DRAFT IMPROVEMENT PLANS - CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISMENT HERITAGE HALL HVAC 30% CD 04/02/24 --
3096 HARDING STREET, CARLSBAD, CA 92008
90% CD 05/10/24 --
1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130
IRVINE, CA. 92606
TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800
IDS
IDS GROUP
Project # 22X006.03
PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/11/24 --
19 No. 30841REM
SATTE
ETER SIG
ER
P
D
LO A
C N
F HO C
A
AL I
F C
ANR
I
O
EFO
ISS
NER ENI GELANI
DARREN
B
. SMITH
Exp. 12/31/24
ELEVATION VIEW AND CONTROLS
M-301
07 P L A N R E V I E W A P P R O V A L
THESE PLANS/DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN
REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS
CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA AND AMENDED BY THE
JURISDICTION. PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF
DOCUMENTS DOES NOT AUTHORIZE
CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF
ANY FEDERAL, STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.
BY: _________________ DATE: ________________
True North Compliance Services, Inc.
THIS SET OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MUST BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES
AND IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE ANY CHANGES OR
ALTERATIONS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM THE
CITY. OCCUPANCY OF STRUCTURE(S) IS NOT
PERMITTED UNTIL FINAL APPROVAL IS GRANTED
BY ALL APPLICABLE DEPARTMENTS.
Ali Al-Murshid
10/25/24
CBC2024-0329_PLANS_V1 11/6/24
1 NO SCALE OUTDOOR UNIT MOUNTING ON NEW PAD
2 NO SCALE ISOLATOR HANGER DETAIL 5 NO SCALE GRAVITY RELIEF HOOD MOUNTING DETAIL (N) CONCRETE PAD 12 BOLT Ø
OR 6" MIN.
FINISH GRADE
12" COMPRESSIVE
MATERIAL ALL
AROUND BASE
COMPACTED SOIL
10"
MIN.
6"
MIN.
1/2" HILTI KB TZ2 WITH 3 1/2" EMBED
(ICC-ESR 4266).
MAX OPER. WEIGHT
311 LBS
MASON SEISMIC ISOLATED
HANGER W/ DOUBLE REBOUND
1/4"1/4"
3"
MAX.
RW-REBOUND WASHER AT
RESTRAINT LOCATION
ROD COUPLING
ROD STIFFENER
THREADED ROD
RW-REBOUND WASHER AT
RESTRAINT LOCATION
ROD COUPLING
HP
1 SEE FLOOR PLAN FOR
DUCT SIZE & CONFIGURATION
9.5"MIN.
20 GA. LEVEL ROOF CURB
FACTORY FABRICATED
8"MIN.
36"MAX.
COUNTER BALANCE
BACKDRAFT DAMPER
WOOD NAILER
40" DIA MAX.
(E) 4X4 BLOCKING F.V.
3/8" DIA. S/S LAG SCREW W/ 3"
MIN. EMBED TO LEVEL WOOD
CURB, AT 24" O.C. (MIN. 3
SCREWS EA SIDE)
(E) 2X ROOF JOIST
@24" O.C. F.V.
EXISTING ROOF
RIGID INSULATION AND
WATER PROOFING PER
ARCH'L
GRAVITY HOOD
COUNTER FLASHING MITER
CORNER W/ WELDED EDGES BY
MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR
#10 x 1.5" S/S TEK SCREWS 20
GA. CONT. GALV. SHEET METAL
GI
1 GR
1 GR
2 MAX OPER. WEIGHT
50 LBS
6 NO SCALE BLOW THORUGH CONDENSATE TRAP DETAIL
7 NO SCALE DRYWELL
8 NO SCALE CONDENSATE TO LAV TAILPIECE DETAIL
9 NO SCALE PIPING DIAGRAM
10 NO SCALE WIRING DIAGRAM
11 NO SCALE NOT USED
HP
2 HP
3 HP
4 PEA GRAVEL, TYP.
24"
12"
36"
1"
2" AIR GAP
24"Ø x 4'-0" DEEP PVC PIPE
CONDENSATE DRAIN FROM
MECH. EQUIPMENT
FINISH GRADE
(CONCRETE)
J.R. SMITH NO.4231-U-G
CLEANOUT. DRILL (17) 1/4"
DIA. HOLES IN TOP.
(N) CONCRETE CAP. CO
RAISED 3" ABOVE GRADE
CONDENSATE P-TRAP SIZING
EQUIPMENT CAPACITY (TONS) MINIMUM CONDENSATE PIPE DIAMETER 0 - 203/4"
21 - 401"
41 - 901-1/4"
91 - 1251-1/2"
126 - 2502"
1 2" MIN
P + 1
2"
DRAIN LINE SHALL BE AT LEAST
THE SAME SIZE AS THE NIPPLE ON
THE DRAIN PAN.
A/C UNIT
POSITIVE
PRESSURE
AT DRAIN
PAN
BLOW THROUGH FAN SYSTEM
P = MAXIMUM PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL
BETWEEN ATMOSPHERE AND DRAIN
PAN CHAMBER (INCHES H20)
UNION
(N) WALL
(E) SINK
(E) TAILPIECE FROM
SINK
APPROVED FITTING
(1 1/4" CHROME PLATED)
CONDENSATE LINE IN WALL BY
PLUMBING CONTRACTOR
3 NO SCALE PIPE SUPPORT ON CONC. WALL
(E) CON. WALL
GAS PIPE
UNISTRUT P1100
SERIES PIPE
CLAMP
UNISTRUT P1000
HILTI KB-TZ2 (ICC
ESR 4266) 3/8"Ø x 2"
MIN. EMBED.
UNISTRUT CHANNEL SUPPORT AT 8'-0" MAX. SPACING
(VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL)
3"
3"
3"
3"
VERTICAL PIPINGHORIZONTAL PIPING
4 NO SCALE CONDENSATE / REFRIG. PIPE SUPPORT ON WOOD STUD WALL 4X6 BLKG. W/
SIMPSON A35 AT
EA. END. TYP.
EQ. TYP.
3/8"Ø x 3" LONG
LAG SCREW
(TYP.)
EQ. TYP.
(E)WOOD
STUD WALLCOND/REFR.
PIPE
P1100 SERIES
PIPE CLAMP
UNISTRUT
P1000
8'-0" MAX. O.C
3"
3"
3"
3"
REFTEKK UX REGID
INSULATION SUPPORT
WITH MATCHING SPLIT
CLAMP.
4X6 BLKG. W/
SIMPSON A35 AT
EA. END. TYP.
UNISTRUT
P1000
EQ. TYP.
EQ. TYP.
WELD 12 GAUGE x 1"
PLATE FULL WIDTH
OF STRUT FOR PIPE
GRAVITY SUPPORT.
(TYP.)
UNISTRUT CHANNEL SUPPORT AT 8'-0" MAX. SPACING
(VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL)
VERTICAL PIPINGHORIZONTAL PIPING
RV&RL 1" INSUL.
(E)WOOD
STUD WALL
MAX WT. OF PIPES SUPPORTED
BY UNISTRUT = 200 LBS.
PART
NUMBER
A"
P2944 6
P2945 12
P2946
P2947
18 24
RJ
SS
DS
HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC
DRAFT IMPROVEMENT PLANS - CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISMENT HERITAGE HALL HVAC 30% CD 04/02/24 --
3096 HARDING STREET, CARLSBAD, CA 92008
90% CD 05/10/24 --
1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130
IRVINE, CA. 92606
TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800
IDS
IDS GROUP
Project # 22X006.03
PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/11/24 --
19 No. 30841REM
SATTE
ETER SIG
ER
P
D
LO A
C N
F HO C
A
AL I
F C
ANR
I
O
EFO
ISS
NER ENI GELANI
DARREN
B
. SMITH
Exp. 12/31/24
DETAILS
M-501
08 P L A N R E V I E W A P P R O V A L
THESE PLANS/DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN
REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS
CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA AND AMENDED BY THE
JURISDICTION. PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF
DOCUMENTS DOES NOT AUTHORIZE
CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF
ANY FEDERAL, STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.
BY: _________________ DATE: ________________
True North Compliance Services, Inc.
THIS SET OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MUST BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES
AND IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE ANY CHANGES OR
ALTERATIONS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM THE
CITY. OCCUPANCY OF STRUCTURE(S) IS NOT
PERMITTED UNTIL FINAL APPROVAL IS GRANTED
BY ALL APPLICABLE DEPARTMENTS.
Ali Al-Murshid
10/25/24
CBC2024-0329_PLANS_V1 11/6/24
RJ
SS
DS
HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC
DRAFT IMPROVEMENT PLANS - CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISMENT HERITAGE HALL HVAC 30% CD 04/02/24 --
3096 HARDING STREET, CARLSBAD, CA 92008
90% CD 05/10/24 --
1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130
IRVINE, CA. 92606
TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800
IDS
IDS GROUP
Project # 22X006.03
PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/11/24 --
19 No. 30841REM
SATTE
ETER SIG
ER
P
D
LO A
C N
F HO C
A
AL I
F C
ANR
I
O
EFO
ISS
NER ENI GELANI
DARREN
B
. SMITH
Exp. 12/31/24
TITLE 24
M-701
09 P L A N R E V I E W A P P R O V A L
THESE PLANS/DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN
REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS
CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA AND AMENDED BY THE
JURISDICTION. PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF
DOCUMENTS DOES NOT AUTHORIZE
CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF
ANY FEDERAL, STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.
BY: _________________ DATE: ________________
True North Compliance Services, Inc.
THIS SET OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MUST BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES
AND IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE ANY CHANGES OR
ALTERATIONS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM THE
CITY. OCCUPANCY OF STRUCTURE(S) IS NOT
PERMITTED UNTIL FINAL APPROVAL IS GRANTED
BY ALL APPLICABLE DEPARTMENTS.
Ali Al-Murshid
10/25/24
CBC2024-0329_PLANS_V1 11/6/24
HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC
DRAFT IMPROVEMENT PLANS - CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISMENT HERITAGE HALL HVAC 30% CD 04/02/24 --
3096 HARDING STREET, CARLSBAD, CA 92008
90% CD 05/10/24 --
1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130
IRVINE, CA. 92606
TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800
IDS
IDS GROUP
Project # 22X006.03
PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/11/24 --
19 CONDUIT CAP-OFF
MIN. 3/4"C- HOMERUN TO PANELBOARD
RACEWAY TURNED DOWN 1/2"C, 2#12 AND 1#12 GND -
TYPICAL U.N.O.
RACEWAY TURNED UP 1/2"C, 2#12 AND 1#12 GND -
TYPICAL U.N.O.
RACEWAY CONCEALED IN WALL OR CEILING 1/2"C,
2#12 AND 1#12 GND - TYPICAL U.N.O.
CONDUIT ROUTED EXPOSED
AAMPERE
AB ABOVE BACK SPLASH
ADA AMERICANS W/DISABILITIES ACT
A.F.F. ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR
AF ARC FAULT
AHU AIR HANDLING UNIT
AMP FUSE
AFG ABOVE FINISHED GRADE
AIC AMPERE INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
AL ALUMINUM
ARCH'L ARCHITECTURAL AS AMP SWITCH
ATS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
AWG AMERICAN WIRE GAUGE
BC BARE COPPER
BLDG BUILDING BLDG
CCONDUIT
CAB CABINET
CAT CATALOG/CATEGORY
CB CIRCUIT BREAKER
CKT CIRCUIT
CLG CEILING
CO CONDUIT ONLY
CC COMM COMMUNICATION
CU COPPER
CTEP CALIFORNIA TYPE EVALUATION
PROGRAM
DEMO,(D) DEMOLITION/DEMOLISH
DISC. DISCONNECT
DN DOWN
DWG DRAWING
EA EACH
EF EXHAUST FAN
EG EQUIPMENT GROUND
ELEC. ELECTRICAL
ELEV ELEVATOR
EM EMERGENCY
EMT ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING
EQUIP EQUIPMENT
(E) EXISTING TO REMAIN
EVCS ELECTRICAL VEHICLE
CHARGING STATION
FACP FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
FBO FURNISHED BY OTHERS
FF FINISHED FLOOR
FIXT FIXTURE
FLA FULL LOAD AMPS
FLEX FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT
(STEEL)
FLUOR FLUORESCENT
FT FEET OR FOOT
GFA GROUND FAULT ALARM
GFCI GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT
INTERRUPTER
GND GROUND
HP HORSEPOWER
HVAC HEATING, VENTILATING &
AIR CONDITIONING
IBC INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE
IMC INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT
IN INCH(ES)
IRC INTERNATIONAL RESIDENTIAL
CODE
ISC SHORT CIRCUIT AMPERES
JB, J-BOX JUNCTION BOX
KCMIL&
MCM THOUSAND CIRCULAR MILS
KVA KILOVOLT AMPERE
KW KILOWATT
LCP LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
LRA LOCK RUNNING AMPS
LOTO LOCK OUT TAG OUT
LTG LIGHTING
MAX. MAXIMUM
MCA MAXIMUM CIRCUIT AMP
MCB MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER
MCC MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
MECH. MECHANICAL
MIN. MINIMUM
MLO MAIN LUGS ONLY
MTD MOUNTED
NC NORMALLY CLOSED
NEC NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
NECA NATIONAL ELECTRICAL
CONTRACTOR'S
ASSOCIATION
NEMA NATIONAL ELECTRICAL
MANUFACTURERS
ASSOCIATION
NEUT NEUTRAL
NFC NATIONAL FIRE CODE
NF NON-FUSIBLE
NFPA NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION
ASSOCIATION
NIC NOT IN CONTRACT
NO NORMALLY OPEN
NTS NOT TO SCALE
OCPD OVER CURRENT PROTECTION
DEVICE
PPOLE
PH PHASE
PNL PANEL
PV PHOTOVOLTAIC
PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE
PWR POWER
QTY QUANTITY
(R) RELOCATE
RECEP RECEPTACLE
REQ'D REQUIRED
RGS RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL
RSC RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
SCHED SCHEDULE
SECT SECTION
SP SINGLE POLE
SN SOLID NEUTRAL
SPEC SPECIFICATION
SW SWITCH
SWBD SWITCHBOARD
SWGR SWITCH GEAR
SYS SYSTEM
TEMP TEMPORARY
TELE TELEPHONE
T-STAT THERMOSTAT
TTB TELEPHONE TERMINAL
BACKBOARD
TTC TELEPHONE TERMINAL
CABINET
TYP. TYPICAL
UBC UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
UL UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY
U.N.O. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
VVOLT OR VOLTAGE
VA VOLT AMPERE
VD VOLTAGE DROP
VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
VP VAPOR PROOF
W WATT, WIRE
WP WEATHERPROOF, NEMA 3R
XFMR TRANSFORMER
- A -
- B -
- C -
- D -
- E -
- F -
- G -
- H -
- I -
- J -
- K -
- L -
- M -
- N -
- O -
- P -
- Q -
- R -
- S -
- T -
- U -
- V -
- W -
- X -
WIRING
MISCELLANEOUS
LIGHTINGSIGNAL POWER
2022 CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE (CEC)
PART 3, TITLE 24, CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS (CCR)
2020 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC) NFPA 70
2022 CALIFORNIA ADMINISTRATIVE CODE (CAC)
PART 1, TITLE 24, CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS (CCR) 2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE (CBC)
PART 2, TITLE 24, CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS (CCR)
2022 CALIFORNIA MECHANICAL CODE (CMC)
PART 4, TITLE 24, CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS (CCR)
2022 CALIFORNIA PLUMBING CODE (CPC)
PART 5, TITLE 24, CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS (CCR)
2022 CALIFORNIA ENERGY CODE (CEC)
PART 6, TITLE 24, CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS (CCR)
2022 CALIFORNIA FIRE CODE (CFC)
PART 9, TITLE 24, CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS (CCR)
2022 CALIFORNIA GREEN BUILDING CODE (CGBC)
PART 11, TITLE 24, CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS (CCR)
APPLICABLE CODES
REVISION SYMBOL
FEEDER SCHEDULED EQUIPMENT
KEYNOTE PLAN SYMBOL
#
SHEET
UNIT
#
1 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TAG
DIAGRAM TAG
1 FIRE ALARM
1 CONDUIT ROUTED UNDER FLOOR/UNDERGROUND
DEMOLITION KEYNOTE PLAN SYMBOL
ELECTRICAL SYMBOL LISTSTANDARD ABBREVIATIONS
PUSH BUTTON CONTROL STATION
DUAL CHANNEL RACEWAY WITH COVER, DUPLEX AND DATA
RECEPTACLES AS NOTED
JUNCTION BOX
JUNCTION BOX - FLUSH FLOOR MOUNT
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH
(WITH SEALTITE RACEWAY CONNECTION
FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH
MOTOR CONTROLLER OR STARTER
METER SERVICE PEDESTAL
SWITCHBOARD OR DISTRIBUTION BOARD
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARD - FLUSH MOUNT
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARD - SURFACE MOUNT
PULLBOX - EXTERIOR OR INTERIOR AS INDICATED
COMBINATION POWER / DATA FLOOR OUTLET AS INDICATED
POWER FLOOR OUTLET WITH DEVICE AS INDICATED
DUPLEX RECEPTACLE NEMA 5-20R, 15A, 125V -
FLUSH MOUNT CEILING
DEDICATED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, NEMA 5-20R, 20A, 125V RATED MOUNT CENTER OF OUTLET AT 18" AFF UON
DUPLEX RECEPTACLE / HALF-SWITCHED "C" INDICATES
CONTROLLED VIA MOTION SENSOR/TIME CLOCK, MOUNT CENTER
OF OUTLET AT 18" AFF UON
QUADPLEX RECEPTACLE, NEMA 5-15R, 20A, 125V, MOUNT CENTER OF OUTLET AT 18" AFF UON
DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, NEMA 5-15R, 20A, 125V RATED, MOUNT
CENTER OF OUTLET AT 18" AFF UON
SINGLE RECEPTACLE, NEMA 5-15R, 20A, 125V, MOUNT CENTER OF OUTLET AT 18" AFF UON
PB
J
J
ATS
F
JJUNCTION BOX - WALL MOUNT
SPECIAL RECEPTACLE 480V RATED w/GROUND AS NOTED
DUPLEX RECEPTACLE NEMA 5-20R, 15A, 125V GFCI TYPE,
MOUNTED 6" ABOVE COUNTER SPLASH
C
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
VFD
COMBINATION USB/DUPLEX NEMA 5-15R, 125V, MOUNTED 18"
AFF UON
DUPLEX RECEPTACLE NEMA 5-15R 125V RATED MOUNTED 6"
ABOVE COUNTER SPLASH
SPECIAL RECEPTACLE. 250V RATED WITH GROUND AS NOTED
MSINGLE MANUAL MOTOR RATED SWITCH (1HP)
COMBINATION USB/DUPLEX NEMA 5-15R, 125V, MOUNTED
6" ABOVE COUNTER
DEDICATED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, NEMA 5-20R, 20A, 125V, GFCI TYPE, RATED MOUNT CENTER OF OUTLET AT 18" AFF UONG
DUPLEX RECEPTACLE NEMA 5-20R, 15A, 125V -
FLUSH MOUNT CEILING
COMBINATION POWER / DATA FLOOR OUTLET NOTED SUITABLE
FOR CONCRETE FLOORS NOTED SUITABLE FOR TYPE 5
CONSTRUCTION
DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR
WALL MOUNTED FIRE ALARM HORN SPEAKER DEVICE
"CD" INDICATES CANDELA; "db" INDICATES DECIBEL LEVEL
FLOW SWITCH
TAMPER SWITCH
ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERDH
FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL 120VFACP
FIRE ALARM SMOKE DETECTOR DEVICE
HEAT DETECTOR
DD
FIRE ALARM PULL STATION
COMBINATION FIRE SMOKE DAMPER
FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATORANN
FS
TS
75cd
30cdWALL MOUNTED HORN STROBE DEVICE
"cd" INDICATES CANDELA; "db" INDICATES DECIBEL LEVEL
SD
WALL MOUNTED STROBE DEVICE
"cd" INDICATES CANDELA
CEILING MOUNTED STROBE DEVICE
"CD" INDICATES CANDELA
15cd
COCARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR
FIRE ALARM BELL MOUNTED +90"A.F.F. PER NFPA72 18.4.8.1
FIRE ALARM TERMINAL CABINETFATC
CSFD
UTILITY COMPANY SERVICE CABLE
TERMINATION
CIRCUIT BREAKER
FUSE
FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH
SWITCH
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR
CURRENT TRANSFORMER (CT)
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
GROUNDING ELECTRODE
UTILITY COMPANY POWER METER
MOTOR (# INDICATED HP)
GENERATOR MOTOR
GROUND FAULT PROTECTION DEVICE
TRANSFER SWITCH ATS OR MTS AND
NUMBER OF POLES AS NOTED
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKER
RELAY
CONTACTOR (NORMALLY OPEN)
CONTACTOR (NORMALLY CLOSED)
CONTROL SWITCH
PUSH BUTTON
R
M
G
TVSS
#
MCUSTOMER OWNED POWER METER
TAC-1
GFPD
PENDANT FIXTURE
LED WALL SCONCE
PHOTOCELL
LIGHTING CONTACTOR
OCCUPANCY SENSOR - WALL MOUNTED
OCCUPANCY SENSOR - CEILING
EXIT SIGN - CEILING MOUNTED (SHADE INDICATES FACE)
BOLLARD LIGHT FIXTURE
PARKING LOT POLE MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE
MONO-POINT LIGHT FIXTURE
LED WALL WASHER
LED WALL MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE
LED DOWNLIGHT RECESSED OR SURFACE
LINEAR LED STRIP FIXTURE
LED WALL MOUNT FIXTURE
LINEAR LED FIXTURE SUSPENDED OR PENDANT
LINEAR LED FIXTURE RECESSED MOUNT
LC
PC
EXIT SIGN - WALL MOUNTED (SHADE INDICATES FACE)
EXIT SIGN - W/ARROWS INDICATE DIRECTION
OS
OS
OCCUPANCY SENSOR w/DIMMER- WALL MOUNTEDOS
D
2,3,4WALL SWITCH, +48" OR AS NOTED: SUBSCRIPTS AT
SYMBOL INDICATE THE FOLLOWING:
abcd
2 - DOUBLE POLE (20A, 120/277V)
3 - THREE WAY (20A, 120/277V)
4 - FOUR WAY (20A, 120/277V)
K - KEY OPERATED (20A, 120/277V)
P - PILOT LIGHT (20A, 120/277V)
R - REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH (20A, 120/277V)
M - MOTOR STARTING SWITCH (20A, 120/277V)
T - TIMER SWITCH (0-60 MIN.) (20A, 120/277V)
LIGHTING CONTROL POWER PACKPP
LIGHTING FIXTURE NOTATION A, 1, b INDICATES:
A = FIXTURE TYPE, REFER TO SCHEDULE
1 = CIRCUIT NUMBER
b = SWITCH CONTROLLING FIXTURE
ab =BI-LEVEL/DUAL SWITCH CONTROL
HALF SHADED LINEAR LED OR SOLID DOWNLIGHT FIXTURE
FURNISHED ON EMERGENCY POWER.
1b
A
D - DIMMER SWITCH (20A, 120/277V)
D,K
EMERGENCY BUG EYE FIXTURE WITH 90 MIN
BATTERY BACKUP
THERMOSTAT OUTLET AT +54" (HVAC
UNIT DESIGNATION)
F05
1. SYMBOLS ARE NOT NECESSARILY USED IN THIS PROJECT.
2. IT IS THE INTENT OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS TO ESTABLISH A STANDARD OF QUALITY. THE ENGINEER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO ALLOW OTHER METHODS AND MATERIALS NOT REFLECTED HEREIN. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO REQUEST THE ENGINEER WAIVE THE STANDARDS TO ALLOW ALTERNATE MEANS AND METHODS PRIOR TO BEGINNING THE PROJECT. CONTRACT
DOCUMENT REVISIONS TO ACCOMMODATE INSTALLED CONDITIONS, WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL, WILL RESULT IN ADDITIONAL DESIGN CHARGES TO THE CONTRACTOR.
3. ELECTRICAL WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED IN A WORKMANLIKE MANNER IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NECA INSTALLATION STANDARDS TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER.
4. WORK, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SHALL CONFORM TO THE CURRENTLY ACCEPTED EDITION OF APPLICABLE NATIONAL, STATE AND CITY CODES AND ORDINANCES.
5. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS SHALL BE LISTED OR LABELED BY UL OR OTHER RECOGNIZED TESTING FACILITY AS ALLOWED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION.
6. WHERE AN APPARENT DISCREPANCY EXISTS BETWEEN THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE GENERAL NOTES AND INFORMATION PORTRAYED IN THE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE IN HIS BID THE COST OF THE GREATER QUALITY OR QUANTITY.
7. CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT JOB SITE PRIOR TO BID AND VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE IN BASE BID COSTS REQUIRED FOR PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS.
8. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY, WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID, ALLOWABLE WORKING HOURS, EMPLOYEE
PARKING AREAS, MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE REQUIREMENTS, DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS, AS WELL AS DAILY CLEAN UP REQUIREMENTS. INCLUDE COSTS IN BID FOR DUST BARRIERS, DUMPSTERS ETC. AS REQUIRED FOR THE DURATION OF THE PROJECT. PERFORM WORK AS DIRECTED BY OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE AND ARCHITECT.
9. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SHALL BE TESTED FOR PROPER OPERATION. IF TESTS SHOW THAT WORK IS DEFECTIVE, CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE NECESSARY CORRECTIONS.
10. CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE WORK AGAINST DEFECTS IN MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP WHICH MAY OCCUR UNDER NORMAL USE FOR A PERIOD OF ONE YEAR AFTER OWNER'S ACCEPTANCE. DEFECTS SHALL BE PROMPTLY CORRECTED BY CONTRACTOR WITHOUT ADDITIONAL CHARGE TO OWNER.
11. DO NOT SCALE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF ALL DEVICES, JUNCTION BOXES, LIGHTING FIXTURES, WITH ARCHITECTURAL AND INTERIOR DESIGN DRAWINGS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE EXACT LOCATION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND OTHER EQUIPMENT REQUIRING ELECTRICAL CONNECTION PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. EVERY OUTLET HEIGHT SHALL BE VERIFIED ON EACH WALL WITH THE INTERIOR PLANNING AND DESIGN DRAWINGS. COORDINATE WITH CABINET SHOP DRAWINGS TO ENSURE PROPER HEIGHT AND LOCATION WITH RESPECT TO MILLWORK, EQUIPMENT.
12. RACEWAY SYSTEMS ARE SHOWN DIAGRAMMATICALLY. ACTUAL LOCATION AND ROUTING SHALL BE DETERMINED BY CONTRACTOR TO SUIT FIELD CONDITIONS.
13. MINIMUM RACEWAY SIZE SHALL BE 3/4"". MINIMUM HOMERUN SIZE SHALL BE 3/4". MINIMUM CONDUCTOR SIZE SHALL BE #12 AWG U.N.O.
TYPICAL. POWER RELATED CONDUITS SHALL HAVE A CODE SIZE GROUND WIRE INSTALLED IN EACH RUN.
14. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE RACEWAY SYSTEMS INDICATED ON THE DRAWING PER CEC REQUIREMENTS AND GENERAL NOTES. ANY
DEVIATION FROM THE WIRING METHODS INDICATED SHALL BE ALLOWED ONLY BY SPECIFIC WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM EITHER THE ARCHITECT, ENGINEER OR OWNER. CONTRACTOR'S BID SHALL INCLUDE COSTS FOR RACEWAY SYSTEMS AS SPECIFIED UNLESS SPECIFIC
WRITTEN APPROVAL FOR AN ALTERNATIVE WIRING METHOD IS OBTAINED FROM EITHER THE ARCHITECT, ENGINEER OR OWNER AND IS SUBMITTED AS PART OF CONTRACTOR'S FORMAL BID PROPOSAL.
15. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW THE COMPLETE SET OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FOR CONFLICTS WITH OTHER TRADES. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO COORDINATE WORK WITH OTHER TRADES TO AVOID CONFLICT DURING INSTALLATION.
CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE MINOR ADJUSTMENTS IN EQUIPMENT LOCATION AND ROUTING AS NECESSARY.
16. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO PROPERLY CUT AND PATCH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION AS REQUIRED TO INSTALL NEW
ELECTRICAL WORK PATCHING SHALL BE OF THE SAME MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH AS THE EXISTING WORK AND SHALL ACCURATELY MATCH SURROUNDING WORK TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT.
17. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL HAVE SUFFICIENT GUTTER SPACE AND LUGS TO ACCOMMODATE QUANTITY AND SIZE OF CONDUCTORS REQUIRED. CONTRACTORS SHALL PROVIDE EQUIPMENT WITH OVERSIZED ENCLOSURES WHERE REQUIRED.
18. NEW SWITCHBOARDS SHALL HAVE LOCKING DOORS AND BE KEYED THE SAME U.N.O.
19. PROVIDE TYPE WRITTEN UPDATED PANEL DIRECTORY TO BE MOUNTED ON INSIDE OF PANEL DOOR COVERS. DIRECTORY SHALL REFLECT ADDITIONS OR MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING PANELS AND SHALL REFLECT ACTUAL "AS-BUILT" CONDITIONS.
20. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS TO ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW OF THE FOLLOWING EQUIPMENT:
a. ELECTRICAL SWITCHGEAR: SWITCHBOARDS, WITH PANELS, MOTOR CONTROL b. OVERCURRENT DEVICES: CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND FUSES INCLUDING c. TIME/CURRENT TRIP CURVES.
d. LIGHT FIXTURES, WIRE DEVICES, CONDUIT & CONDUCTORS.
e. MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND ASSOCIATED STARTERS.
34. EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL TERMINATIONS TO UNDERGO A TORQUE TEST. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED TORQUE DOCUMENTATION AND TOOLS TO PERFORM TORQUE TEST.
35. UNDERGROUND SERVICE CONDUITS SHALL BE SEALED PER CEC ARTICLE 230-8.
36. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE MOUNTED ON A 6" HIGH CONCRETE PAD.
37. ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LABELED, LISTED, OR CERTIFIED BY A NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED TESTING LABORATORY ACCREDITED BY THE UNITED STATES OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY HEALTH ADMINISTRATION.
38. CONTRACTOR SHALL REPAIR ANY DAMAGED IRRIGATION LINES TO MATCH EXISTING CONDITIONS. FIELD VERIFY AND COORDINATE PRIOR ANY EXCAVATION WORK.
GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES
E-001 GENERAL NOTES, LEGENDS, AND ABBREVIATIONS
E-002 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
E-100 FLOOR PLANS - ELECTRICAL
SHEET INDEX
E-001
GENERAL NOTE, SYMBOLS AND
ABBREVIATIONS
FO
L CA
I
R SIEG
N
E
C
No. E22808L
TA
S
ETE
I
TR
EC E
S
ET
R
V
TE
IN
A
A
L
FOR
I GNE
R NEE
R
D
P
FO
E
SS
IO
L
NAN
L
CO
I L
S
M.
Exp. 06-30-25
DATE SIGNEDDATE SIGNED 10/11/24
10 P L A N R E V I E W A P P R O V A L
THESE PLANS/DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN
REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS
CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA AND AMENDED BY THE
JURISDICTION. PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF
DOCUMENTS DOES NOT AUTHORIZE
CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF
ANY FEDERAL, STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.
BY: _________________ DATE: ________________
True North Compliance Services, Inc.
THIS SET OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MUST BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES
AND IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE ANY CHANGES OR
ALTERATIONS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM THE
CITY. OCCUPANCY OF STRUCTURE(S) IS NOT
PERMITTED UNTIL FINAL APPROVAL IS GRANTED
BY ALL APPLICABLE DEPARTMENTS.
Ali Al-Murshid
10/25/24
CBC2024-0329_PLANS_V1 11/6/24
HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC
DRAFT IMPROVEMENT PLANS - CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISMENT HERITAGE HALL HVAC 30% CD 04/02/24 --
3096 HARDING STREET, CARLSBAD, CA 92008
90% CD 05/10/24 --
1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130
IRVINE, CA. 92606
TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800
IDS
IDS GROUP
Project # 22X006.03
PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/11/24 --
19 1. THE DESIGN PROFESSIONAL HAS PERFORMED ALL REQUIRED VOLTAGE DROP
CALCULATIONS AND BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS COMPLY WITH NEC 210-19(A) FPN NO. 4.
2. EACH SERVICE DISCONNECTING MEANS, AND THE EXTERIOR DOOR PROVIDING
ACCESS TO THE DISCONNECTING MEANS, LOCATED IN AN APPROVED ELECTRICAL ROOM, SHALL BE PERMANENTLY MARKED WITH A 1 FOOT SQUARE YELLOW SIGN WITH 1" HIGH X 1/4" STROKE BLACK LETTERING OR NUMBERS AS REQUIRED BY CODE AND THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION.
3. UPDATE PANEL DIRECTORIES TO REFLECT FINAL AS-BUILT CONDITION.
DIRECTORIES SHALL BE TYPED AND PLACED IN PANEL DOOR.
4. ADDED CIRCUIT BREAKERS TO EXISTING PANELS SHALL MATCH EXISTING PANEL CHARACTERISTICS AND AIC RATING.
GENERAL NOTES
1 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
M
(E)
N
G
BOND (E) COLD
WATER PIPE
SDGE
(E) SERVICE
GROUNDING
ELECTRODE
2X (E) WEATHERHEAD
INCOMING FROM SDGE
(E)
(E)
PANEL
C
PANEL
M
PANEL
CA
(E)
(E)
(E)
(E) OVERHEAD TO
(E) SDGE POLE MTD
XFMR
KEYNOTES
1PROVIDE AND INSTALL NEW CIRCUIT BREAKERS IN EXISTING PANEL TO MATCH EXISTING PANEL CHARACTERISTICS. UPDATE WITH A TYPED PANEL DIRECTORY AND REPLACE INSIDE EXISTING PANEL DOOR.
NEW LOAD ADDED TO PANEL.
PROVIDE ADDITIONAL LABELING IN SPACE PROVISIONS AND PANEL DOOR THAT PANEL
IS NOT CAPABLE OF ANY ADDITIONAL LOAD UNLESS APPROVED BY PUBLIC WORKS ENGINEERING.
RETURN EXISTING 20A-2P CIRCUIT BREAKERS TO PUBLIC WORKS PROJECT MANAGER. 2 2
1 2
(E) (3)#4 & (1)#8 THWN
GND. IN
1 1/4" C. (EMT)
(E)
1 3
3 2
NEW LOAD
E-002
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM & PANEL SCHEDULES
MLO
200AS
200AF
2P
200AS
200AF
2P
(E)
PANEL
B
200AS
200AF
2P
MLO
(E)
PANEL
A
100AS
100AF
2P
100AS
100AF
2P
(E)
PANEL
D
600A BUS
(E)MAIN METERED
SWITCBOARD 'MS'
600A, 120/240V, 1Ø, 3W
100AS
SPARE
2P
100AS
SPARE
2P
(E)
(E)
(E)
(E)
FO
L CA
I
R SIEG
N
E
C
No. E22808L
TA
S
ETE
I
TR
EC E
S
ET
R
V
TE
IN
A
A
L
FOR
I GNE
R NEE
R
D
P
FO
E
SS
IO
L
NAN
L
CO
I L
S
M.
Exp. 06-30-25
DATE SIGNEDDATE SIGNED 10/11/24
11 P L A N R E V I E W A P P R O V A L
THESE PLANS/DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN
REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS
CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA AND AMENDED BY THE
JURISDICTION. PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF
DOCUMENTS DOES NOT AUTHORIZE
CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF
ANY FEDERAL, STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.
BY: _________________ DATE: ________________
True North Compliance Services, Inc.
THIS SET OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MUST BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES
AND IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE ANY CHANGES OR
ALTERATIONS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM THE
CITY. OCCUPANCY OF STRUCTURE(S) IS NOT
PERMITTED UNTIL FINAL APPROVAL IS GRANTED
BY ALL APPLICABLE DEPARTMENTS.
Ali Al-Murshid
10/25/24
CBC2024-0329_PLANS_V1 11/6/24
(E) FPH
(E) OVERHEAD
POWER LINE TO (E) SDGE
POWER POLE MTD XFMR
(E)
WEATHERHEAD
(E) METER/MAIN
SWITCH
(E) PANEL 'M'
(E) PANEL 'C'
(E) PANEL
'CA'
FFFF
CO2T
CO2T
T CO2
CO2T
FC
4 FC
3 HP
4 240V,1Ø,
3.56MCA
240V,1Ø,
3.56MCA
240V,1Ø,
36.3MCA
HP
3 240V,1Ø,
36.3MCA
HP
2 240V,1Ø,
36.3MCA
HP
1 240V,1Ø,
36.3MCA
M-13,153
1A
E-100
TYP
J
J
J
J
S2P
MS2P
M
M-25,27
M-29,31
JJ
5 2TYP
4 4
C-26
26 WP26
M-9,113
M-5,73
M-1,33
J
TO (E) PNL 'M'
UP
UP
B
E-100
TYP
B
E-100
TYP
(D) EF-1(D) EF-21 1
(D) MECH.1
FC
2 FC
1 240V,1Ø,3.56MCA
240V,1Ø,3.56MCA
S2P
MS2P
M
M-17,19
M-21,23
(ON ROOF) (ON ROOF)
JJ
26 1/2"C.O. (EMT)
CA-2
(D) MECH.1
N
W
S
E
1 1/8" = 1'-0" FIRST FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLAN
GENERAL NOTES
HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC
DRAFT IMPROVEMENT PLANS - CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISMENT HERITAGE HALL HVAC 30% CD 04/02/24 --
3096 HARDING STREET, CARLSBAD, CA 92008
90% CD 05/10/24 --
1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130
IRVINE, CA. 92606
TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800
IDS
IDS GROUP
Project # 22X006.03
PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/11/24 --
19 2 1/8"=1'-0" ENLARGED SECOND FLOOR-ELECTRICAL PLAN
1. ANY ADDED CONDUIT TO BUILDING EXTERIOR SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH EXISTING BUILDING BUILDING EXTERIOR.
2. ANY ADDED CONDUIT ROUTED UP AT THE COMMUNITY ROOM SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH EXISTING INTERIOR FINISHES.
3. EXTERIOR CONDUIT SHALL BE RGS. NO EXCEPTIONS.
4. MC CABLING IS NOT ALLOWED. NO EXCEPTIONS.
5. EXTERIOR ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES SHALL BE NEMA 3R ALUMINUM OR NEMA 4X STAINLESS STEEL.
6. FINAL CONNECTION TO EXTERIOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE MADE WITH SEALTIGHT CONDUIT AND SHALL NOT EXCEED 36" IN LENGTH.
7. PROVIDE CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES ADJACENT TO ABOVE CEILING EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH CEC 210.63.
8. CONTRACTOR SHALL SAW CUT EXISTING CONCRETE, TRENCH, INSTALL CONDUIT,
OBTAIN CITY INSPECTION, BACKFILL, COMPACT, AND RESTORE EXISTING HARD SCAPE SURFACES TO MATCH EXISTING CONDITIONS. TRANSPORTS AND DISPOSE UNUSED EARTH AND CONCRETE DEBRIS.
9. LOW VOLTAGE CABLING SHALL BE INSTALLED IN CONDUIT.
N
W
S
E
KEYNOTE
PROVIDE AND INSTALL A 250V, 100A, 2P + EQUIPMENT GROUND FUSIBLE DISCONNECT SWITCH. NEMA 3R ALUMINUM OR NEMA 4X STAINLESS STEEL ENCLOSURE. AND FUSE PER MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. FINAL CONNECTION TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE MADE
WITH LIQUID FLEXIBLE TIGHT CONDUIT AND TERMINATE CONDUCTORS IN ACCORDANCE MANUFACTURER'S EQUIPMENT INSTRUCTIONS.
PROVIDE WEATHERPROOF JUNCTION BOX AND SEALTIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FOR EQUIPMENT CONTROL WIRING. CONTROL WIRING SHALL BE PERFORMED, TERMINATED AND TESTED BY THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR.
3/4"C. (PVC) w/ (2)#6 & (1)#10 GND. (THWN). CHANGE TO EMT CONDUIT FOR INDOOR INSTALLATION. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION FOR BUILDING ENTRY.
EXPOSED EXTERIOR CONDUIT SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH BUILDING EXTERIOR.
EXTEND 3/4"C. (PVC) TO FAN COIL UNITS ON SECOND FLOOR. CHANGE TO EMT CONDUIT FOR INDOOR INSTALLATION. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION FOR BUILDING ENTRY. EXPOSED EXTERIOR CONDUIT SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH BUILDING EXTERIOR.
RECEPTACLE SHALL BE MOUNTED AND ACCESSIBLE AT APPROXIMATELY THE SAME HEIGHT AS MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. FIELD COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION. 1 2
1 DEMOLITION NOTES
DISCONNECT EXISTING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND REMOVE EXISTING ELECTRICAL DEVICES, CONDUIT, WIRING, & FITTINGS COMPLETE.
3 4
E-100
FLOOR PLANS - ELECTRICAL
5 B NO SCALE CONDUIT MOUNTING DETAIL
A NO SCALE DISCONNECT MOUNTING DETAIL
TOTAL RGS CONDUIT
WEIGHT NOT TO
EXCEED 150lBS/FT.
2"
1'-6"
EMT SHALL BE SECURELY FASTENED IN PLACE AT LEAST EVERY 3 m (10 FT).
RGS CONDUIT
TRADE SIZE
SIZE AND EMBEDMENT
OF ANCHOR BOLTS
12"C - 2 12"C14" X 1 38
3"C - 4"C516" X 1 12"
(E) 1/2"Ø S.S. HILTI KBTZ
ANCHOR BOLTS WITH 3"
EMBED
CONDUIT CLAMP
HEX NUT &
BOLT
UNISTRUT P1000 S.S.
ASTM A101
(E)
CONCRETE
WALL
NOTES:
SEE NOTE 2
1. PROVIDE/INSTALL (4) 1/2"Ø STAINLESS STEEL HILTI KWIK BOLT TZ2 WITH MINIMUM EMB. = 2 1/4", ICC - ESR # 1917.
2. HEIGHT AS REQUIRED, VERIFY HEIGHT WITH EQUIPMENT
MANUFACTURER.
HSS2x2x1/4
1/4-20 S.M.S. TYP OF 4
CONDUIT CLAMP WITH BOLT
AND NUT
ELECTRICAL CONDUIT SEE
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR
SIZES AND QUANTITY
REFER TO MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT FOR
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
SEALTIGHT FLEX CONDUIT
TO AC UNIT
NEMA-3R ALUMINUM ON
NEMA 4X STAINLESS STEEL
TO PANEL
24" MIN.
D/S
FO
L CA
I
R SIEG
N
E
C
No. E22808L
TA
S
ETE
I
TR
EC E
S
ET
R
V
TE
IN
A
A
L
FOR
I GNE
R NEE
R
D
P
FO
E
SS
IO
L
NAN
L
CO
I L
S
M.
Exp. 06-30-25
DATE SIGNEDDATE SIGNED 10/11/24
12 P L A N R E V I E W A P P R O V A L
THESE PLANS/DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN
REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS
CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA AND AMENDED BY THE
JURISDICTION. PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF
DOCUMENTS DOES NOT AUTHORIZE
CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF
ANY FEDERAL, STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.
BY: _________________ DATE: ________________
True North Compliance Services, Inc.
THIS SET OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MUST BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES
AND IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE ANY CHANGES OR
ALTERATIONS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM THE
CITY. OCCUPANCY OF STRUCTURE(S) IS NOT
PERMITTED UNTIL FINAL APPROVAL IS GRANTED
BY ALL APPLICABLE DEPARTMENTS.
Ali Al-Murshid
10/25/24
CBC2024-0329_PLANS_V1 11/6/24
GENERAL
SCOPE OF WORK
TOLERANCE
1. PERMITTED TOLERANCE SHALL BE ACCORDING TO THE CBC.
DESIGN CRITERIA
DESIGN CONFORMS TO THE 2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE.
1. SEISMIC ANALYSIS: EQUIVALENT LATERAL FORCE PROCEDURE ·SITE CLASS = D - DEFAULT
·SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY = D
·RISK OCCUPANCY CATEGORY = II
·Ie = 1.00
·Ss = 1.066g
·S1 = 0.386 g
·Fa = 1.2
·Sds = 1.654
FOR CONDENSING UNIT
·Ap = 1.00
·Rp = 2.50
·Ω = 2.00
·Fp = 0.853 Wp FOR BOILER ON SLAB ON GRADE
·FOR FAN COIL UNIT
·Ap = 2.50
·Rp = 6.00
·Fp = 0.427 Wp
2. WIND ANALYSIS: WIND LOADS ARE BASED ON CBC WITH THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
·EXPOSURE CATEGORY = C
·V = 96 MPH
·Vasd = 74.36 MPH
·KZ = 0.98
·Kzt = 0.8
·KE = I.0
·RISK CATEGORY II
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
THE SCOPE OF WORK FOR THIS PROJECT IS TO PROVIDE SUPPORT FOR THE FOLLOWING LIST:
. VRF OUTDOOR CONDENSING UNIT
. VRF INDOOR FAN COIL UNIT
NON-SHRINK GROUT
1. NON- SHRINK GROUT SHALL BE SIKA SIKAGROUT 212, OR APPROVED EQUAL.
2. SURFACE PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION SHALL FOLLOW MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS.
PROPER SURFACE CLEANING AND MOIST CURING ARE ESSNTIAL.
3. FOR POURABLE GROUT, CONSTRUCT FORMS TO RETAIN GROUT WITHOUT LEAKAGE. FORMS SHALL BE LINED OR COATED WITH BOND-BREAKER FOR EASY REMOVAL.
4. NON-SHRINK GROUT SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 7,000 PSI AT 28 DAYS.
5. GROUT SHAL BE NON-SHRINK GROUT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED..
6. REPAIR UNUSED CORED OR DRILLED HOLES BY FILLING WITH NON-SHRINK GROUT AT CONCRETE AND MASONRY, FINISH SURFACE TO MATCH THE ADJACENT CONDITION.
1. PORTLAND CEMENT SHALL BE ASTM C150 TYPE V UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
2. ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE NORMAL WEIGHT (145 PCF) HARD ROCK TYPE ASTM C33.
3. CONCRETE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (f'c) AT 28 DAYS AS FOLLOWS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED:
A. EQUIPMENT PAD FOOTING FOOTING: 4,000 PSI UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
B. SLAB-ON-GRADE: 4,000 PSI UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
4. CONCRETE MIXES SHALL BE DESIGNED BY A QUALIFIED TESTING LABORATORY, BEARING A
REGISTERED CALIFORNIA CIVIL ENGINEER'S STAMP, AND REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE SEOR PRIOR TO USE.
5. MAXIMUM RATIO OF WATER TO CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS, BY WEIGHT, SHALL BE 0.45 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. USE MINIMUM 6 SACKS OF CEMENT PER CUBIC YARD OF CONCRETE.
6. ALL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS SHALL BE KEYED AND SHALL BE THOROUGHLY CLEANED. SEE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE NOTE 10.
7. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT THE PROPOSED LOCATION OF ALL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS TO THE ENGINEER FOR REVIEW PRIOR PLACING OF CONCRETE. POUR JOINTS SHALL BE LOCATED TO MINIMIZE EFFECTS OF SHRINKAGE AS WELL AS PLACED AT POINTS OF LOW STRESS. REFER TO ACI 318, SEC.
26.5.6. 8. CONCRETE COVERAGE OF REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED:
A. CONCRETE CAST AGAINST AND PERMANENTLY EXPOSED TO EARTH: 3" B. CONCRETE EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER:
·#6 THROUGH #18 REBAR: 2”
·#5 REBAR, W31 OR D31 WIRE, AND SMALLER: 1 1/2"
C. CONCRETE NOT EXPOSED TO WEATHER OR IN CONTACT WITH GROUND:
·SLABS, WALLS AND JOISTS (#11 REBAR AND SMALLER): 1"
·BEAMS AND COLUMNS: 1-1/2"
D. SLABS-ON-GRADE: MID-DEPTH
9. ALL EXPOSED CONCRETE EDGES SHALL BE FORMED WITH A 3/4" CHAMFER UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
10. ALL NEW CONCRETE PLACED AGAINST HARDENED CONCRETE SHALL BE PREPARED PER THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE:
A. ROUGHEN HARDENED SURFACE TO AN AMPLITUDE OF 1/4" WITH BUSH HAMMER, SAND BLASTING, OR OTHER APPROVED METHOD.
B. CLEAN SURFACES OF DUST AND DEBRIS USING CLEAN COMPRESSED AIR AND WATER.
C. THE SURFACE OF ALL HORIZONTAL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS SHALL BE CLEANED AND ROUGHED BY EXPOSING CLEAN AGGREGATE SOLIDLY EMBEDDED IN MORTAR MATRIX. IN THE EVENT THAT THE CONTACT SURFACE BECOMES COATED WITH EARTH, SAWDUST, ETC., AFTER BEING CLEANED, THE ENTIRE SURFACE SO COATED SHALL BE RECLEANED.
D. REFER TO OTHER NOTES FOR DUST CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION.
E. BONDING AGENTS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE OR A SUBSTITUTE FOR PROCEDURES A, B. AND C.
11. BONDING AGENT WHEN SPECIFIED SHALL BE CHEMREX CONCRESIVE LIQUID LPL, OR SIKA ARMATEC 110
EPOCEM, OR APPROVED EQUAL AND SHALL BE APPLIED FOLLOWING THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS.
12. THE NOMINAL MAXIMUM SIZE OF COARSE AGGREGATES SHALL BE 1" UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
13. ALL CRACKS WIDER THAN 1/64" IN NEW CONCRETE APPEARING WITHIN 6 MONTHS OF CONCRETE
PLACEMENT SHALL BE REPAIRED USING EPOXY ADHESIVE INJECTION BY THE CONTRACTOR AT NO COST TO THE OWNER.
14. CONCRETE SHALL BE MIXED, PLACED AND CURED PER ACI 318, LATEST EDITION AND PROJECT SPECIFICATION.
1. ALL CONCRETE AND MASONRY SHALL BE REINFORCED. REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE NEW DEFORMED STEEL BARS CONFORMING TO ASTM A615, GRADE 60 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
2. REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE ACCURATELY PLACED AND FIRMLY SUPPORTED DURING CONCRETE POUR.
3. COMPLETE REINFORCING STEEL PLACEMENT DRAWINGS SHALL BE PREPARED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 315 BY THE CONTRACTOR AND REVIEWED BY THE SEOR AND SHALL BE AVAILABLE ON THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO INSPECTION AND THE PLACING OF CONCRETE.
4. ANCHOR BOLTS, DOWELS AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS SHALL BE SECURELY ANCHORED AND/OR TIED IN PLACE BEFORE CONCRETE IS PLACED.
5. ALL REINFORCING STEEL TO BE WELDED SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A706, GRADE 60. DEFORMATIONS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A615.
6. ALL WELDING OF REINFORCING STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO AWS D1.4 AND SHALL BE PERFORMED BY CERTIFIED WELDERS USING AWS A5.5 E80XX FOR ASTM A706 GRADE 60 (TABLE 7.1 AWS D1.4) LOW HYDROGEN MOISTURE RESISTING ELECTRODES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
7. NO HEATING SHALL BE ALLOWED FOR BENDING OF REINFORCING STEEL UNLESS APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER.
8. ALL MECHANICAL SPLICES SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE SEOR AND INSPECTED DURING CONSTRUCTION AND SHALL HAVE AN ICC-ES/IAPMO NUMBER.
9. ALL HEADED BAR SYSTEMS (TERMINATORS) SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE SEOR AND INSPECTED DURING CONSTRUCTION AND SHALL HAVE AN ICC-ES/IAPMO NUMBER.
10. ALL REINFORCING STEEL INTERRUPTED BY STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL TERMINATE WITHIN 1" OF STEEL SURFACE WITH A 90° STANDARD HOOK UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
11. ALL REINFORCING BEND SHALL BE MADE COLD. RE-BENDING OR PREVIOUSLY BENT REINFORCING IS NOT PERMITTED.
REINFORCING STEEL
ADHESIVE ANCHOR SYSTEM FOR THREADED ROD OR REBAR IN CONCRETE
MINIMUM EMBEDMENT
DEPTH (U.N.O.)
#5
THREAD ROD
DIAMETER (Ø)
#4
9,300 LB 6"
412"
5,600 LB
TESTING FORCE
AN EQUIVALENT PRODUCT ACCEPTABLE TO ENGINEER
HILTI HIT - RE 500 V3
SIMPSON - SET-XP
ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
ESR-3814
ESR-2508
ICC-ES EVALUATION REPORT
REBAR SIZE
ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
HILTI - KWIK BOLT TZ2
SIMPSON - STRONG-BOLT 2
DEPTH (U.N.O.)
212"
AN EQUIVALENT PRODUCT ACCEPTABLE TO ENGINEER
ICC-ES EVALUATION REPORT
ESR-4266
ESR-3037
HILTI KWIK BOLT TZ2
338"
BOLT DIAMETER (Ø)EFFECTIVE MIN.
DEPTH , U.N.O.
38"30
12"50 314"
INSTALLATION TORQUE (FT-LB)
*
SIMPSON STRONG-TIE STRONG-BOLT 2
ANCHORS MUST ATTAIN SPECIFIED TORQUE WITHIN 1/2 TURN OF THE NUT. INSTALLATION TORQUE APPLIES TO CARBON STEEL ANCHORS. REFER TO ICC REPORT FOR INSTALLATION TORQUE REQUIRED FOR STAINLESS STEEL ANCHORS.
ANCHORS MUST ATTAIN SPECIFIED TORQUE WITHIN 1/2 TURN OF THE NUT. INSTALLATION TORQUE APPLIES TO CARBON STEEL ANCHORS. REFER TO ICC REPORT FOR INSTALLATION TORQUE REQUIRED FOR STAINLESS STEEL ANCHORS.
312"
7"
8"
9"
#3
#6
#7
#8
3,400 LB
13,450 LB
16,800 LB
22,600 LB
412"
5"
58"
34"
4"
434"
40 110
2"
BOLT DIAMETER (Ø)
38"
12"
58"
34"
38" DIA
12" DIA
58" DIA
34" DIA
78" DIA
1" DIA
REFER TO PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS FOR PROJECT REQUIREMENTS.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SAFETY OF WORK AREA DURING CONSTRUCTION PERIOD. THE CONTRCTOR SHALL PROTECT ADJACENT PROPERTY AND UTILITIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL NATIONAL, STATE, AND LOCAL SAFETY ORDINANCES.
DRAWINGS INDICATE GENERAL AND TYPICAL DETAILS OF CONSTRACTION. WHERE CONDITIONS ARE
NOT SPECIFICALLY INDICATED BUT ARE OF SIMILAR CHARACTER TO DETAILS SHOW, SIMILAR DETAILS OF CONSTRACTION SHALL BE USED SUBJECT TO PRIOR REVIEW BY THE SEOR.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPERVISE AND DIRECT THE WORK, AND SHALL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CONSTRUCTION MEANS, METHODS, TECHNIQUES, SEQUENCES AND PROCEDURES. THE
SUPPORTING SERVICES BY THE SEOR, WHETHER PERFORMED PRIOR TO, DURING, OR AFTER
CONSTRUCTION, ARE PERFORMED SOLELY FOR THE PURPOSE OF ASSISTING IN QUALITY CONTROL AND IN ACHIEVING CONFORMANCE WITH CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS; BUT
THEY DO NOT GUARANTEE THE CONTRACTOR'S PERFORMANCE AND SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED AS SUPERVISION OF CONSTRUCTION.
SHOP DRAWINGS REQUIRED BY THE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE SEOR FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO FABRICATION. DRAWINGS ARE REVIEWED BY THE SEOR FOR GENERAL CONFORMANCE TO THE DESIGN. REGARDLESS OF THE SEOR'S REVIEW, THE CONTRACTOR IS FULLY
AND SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLETE AND SATISFACTORY SUBMITTAL AND CONFORMANCE TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. SHOP DRAWINGS WILL BE REJECTED FOR INCOMPLETENESS, LACK OF CALCULATIONS (IF REQUIRED) OR CHANGES WITHOUT PRE-APPROVAL. ALL STRUCTURAL
CALCULATIONS AND DRAWINGS AS PART OF THE SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTAL SHALL BE SIGNED AND STAMPED BY A CALIFORNIA REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER.
ANY PARTS OF WORK AREA WHICH ARE TO BE BARRRICATED OR SEALED TO
NON-CONCTRUCTION INDIVIDUALS MUST BE COORDINATED WITH AND APPROVED BY THE OWNER BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL EXERT EVERY EFFORT TO PREVENT DUST AND CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS FROM CONTAMINATING THE WORK AREA. THESE EFFORTS SHALL INCLUDE BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO PROVIDING A DAILY CLEANUP OF THE CONSTRUCTION AREA. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO THE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO SECURE THE CONSTRUCTION SITE.
CUTTING, BORING, SAW-CUTTING OR DRILLING THROUGH NEW STRUCTURAL MEMBERS OTHER THAN
THOSE DETAILED ON STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS SHALL NOT BE DONE WITHOUT THE SEOR'S APPROVAL.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL:
A. CHECK DIMENSIONS.
B. BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING THE WORK OF ALL TRADES ALL DISCREPANCIES SHALL
BE CALLED TO THE ATTENSION OF THE SEOR AND SHALL BE RESOLVED BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK.
ALL MATERIALS, FEATURES OR CONDITION NOT IDENTIFIED AS (E) WHICH MEANS "EXISTING, SHALLBE BE CONSIDERED AS NEW AND PART OF THE PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK.
THE CONTRACTOR IS FULLY AND SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL SHORING REQUIRED IN ORDER TO SAFELY ACHIEVE THE FINAL CONSTRUCTION SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. THIS INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO, ANY TYPES OF SHORING REQUIRED FOR SOILS EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL WORK;
SUPPORT OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS UNTIL THEY HAVE ACHIEVED THE NECESSARY STRENGTH TO PERFORM IN THE FINAL POSITION AND MANNER SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS; AND SUPPORT OF
STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS THAT ARE MODIFIED AND THEREBY REDUCED IN STRENGTH IN ANY WAY
DURING CONSTRUCTION AS REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE THE FINAL CONSTRUCTION AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. ALL SHORING CALCULATIONS AND DRAWINGS SHALL BE STAMPED BY A CALIFORNIA REGISTERED ENGINEER AND SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO PERFORMING THE WORK.
WHERE NOT INDICATED OTHERWISE, THE LATEST EDITION OF ALL CITED DOCUMENTS SHALL GOVERN.
THE TERM CBC IN THESE DRAWINGS MEANS 2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE. CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS, TITLE PARTS AND VOLUMES AND ALL CITY OF CARLSBAD AMMENDMENTS.
ALL CONTRUCTIONS AND WORKMANSHIP, INCLUDING MATERIALS, SHALL CONFORM TO THES DRAWINGS, PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS, AND THE CBC.
PROVIDE ALL MEASURES NECESSARY TO PROTECT THE STRUCTURE AND ADJACENT STRUCTURE(S),AND THEIR FINISHES AND UTILITIES, DURING CONSTRUCTION.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS WITH OTHER DRAWINGS AND SHALL
CONDUCT A DETAILED SURVEY OF EXISTING UTILITIES TO IDENTIFY INTERFERENCES WITH THE NEW CONSTRUCTION. PROMPTLY NOTIFY THE SEOR OF ANY INTERFERENCES PRIOR TO PERFORMING THE WORK.
CORING, TRENCHING & EXCAVATIONS:
PRIOR TO CORING, TRENCHING, AND EXCAVATIONS, THE CONTRACOR ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR AND IS
REQUIRED TO USE AN INDEPENDENT UTILITY LOCATING SERVICE TO LOCATION ALL UTILITIES WITHIN
THE IMPACTED AREA(S) THE INDEPENDENT UTILITY LOCATING SERVICE SHALL PROVIDE
CERTIFICATION THAT IT HAS LOCATED ALL UTILITIES IN THE IMPACTED AREA(S) AND THE
CONTRACTOR MUST DEPICT ALL DISCOVERED UTILITIES ACCURATELY ON REDLINES/AS-BUILT PLANS
FOR SUBMISSION TO THE CITY OF CARLSBAD FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO
COMMENCEMENT OF CORING, TRENCHING, OR EXCAVATIONS, IN ADDITION, FOR UTILITIES REQUIRING
EXTERNAL AGENCY NOTIFICATION, COORDINATION AND APPROVALS, THE CONTRACTOR MUST PROVIDE PROOF OF NOTIFICATION, COORDINATION AND REVIEWS BY EXTERNAL AGENCIES.
ALL SPECIAL/DEPUTY INSPECTION REPORTS AND TEST SHALL INCLUDE: JOB NAME AND JOB NUMBER, SITE LOCATION PLAN PAGE AND DETAILS ANY RFI AND REFERENCES.
1. 2.
3. 4.
5. 6.
7. 8.
9. 10.
11. 12.
13. 14.
15. 16.
17. 18.
AS-BUILT CONDITIONS
CONTRACTOR MUST FULLY MEASURE THE (E) STRUCTURE BEFORE FABRICATING/CUTTING ANY NEW STEEL OR WOOD MEMBERS TO BE INSTALLED INTO STRUCTURE PER THESE DRAWINGS.
ALL NEW STEEL AND WOOD MEMBERS MUST BE FABRICATED/CUT TO THE ACTUAL AS-BUILT
STRUCTURE DIMENSIONS IN ORDER TO ASSURE PROPER FIT-UP AND INSTALLATION AS SHOWN IN THE CONNECTION, SUPPORT AND OTHER DETAILS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS.
MODIFICATION OF THE DESIGN OR DETAILS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS IN ORDER TO ACCOMODATE
IMPROPER FIT-UP DUE TO LACK OF AS-BUILT MEASUREMENTS AND/OR FABRICATION ERRORS WILL NOT BE ALLOWED AND WILL BE THE BASIS FOR REJECTION OF THE INSTALLATION.
CONDITIONS SHOWN OR NOTES AS EXISTING ARE BASES ON THE INFORMATION AVAILABLE AT THE TIME OF THE PREPARATION OF THESE DRAWINGS. NO WARRANTY IS IMPLIED AS TO ACCURACY OF EXISTING CONDITIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO THE ORIGINAL CONSTRUCTION
DOCUMENTS (IF ANY) FOR INFORMATION REGARDING EXISTING CONSTRUCTION AND SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS. IF CONDITIONS BECOME APPARENT WHICH DIFFER FROM THE CONDITIONS
SHOWN HEREIN, THEY SHALL BE BROUGHT THE IMMEDIATE ATTENTION OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. DIMENSIONS TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER SCALE OF DRAWING, HOWEVER, SIGNIFICANT CONFLICTS SHALL BE RESOLVED AS NOTED.
1. 2.
3. 4.
30 40
60 125
CARBON STEELSTAINLESS STEEL
30 50
40 110
30 40
60 125
INSTALLATION TORQUE (FT-LB)
CARBON STEELSTAINLESS STEEL
INSTALLATION TORQUE (FT-LB)
*
POST-INSTALLED ANCHORAGE INTO CONCRETE
1. ANCHORAGE SHALL BE INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS, AND SHALL COMPLY WITH ACI 318 CHAPTER 17 AND CBC.
2. ADHESIVE ANCHOR INSTALLERS SHALL BE CERTIFIED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ACI-CRSI ADHESIVE ANCHOR INSTALLER CERTIFICATION PROGRAM.
3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE A WRITTEN PROCEDURE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION FOR AN
INSTALLATION METHOD TO AVOID DRILLING INTO OR CONTACTING IN ANY WAY REINFORCING STEEL AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS. APPROVED METHODS COULD INCLUDE PLASTIC MARKINGS
FORMED INTO THE CONCRETE SURFACE, OR USE OF GROUND PENETRATING RADAR EQUIPMENT SUCH AS HILTI FERROSCAN PS300. ANCHORS SHALL CLEAR EXISTING REBAR BY 1" MIN.
4. CONFORM WITH ICC RECOMMENDED VALUES FOR ANCHOR SPACING AND EDGE DISTANCE TO DEVELOP FULL (100%) ALLOWABLE TENSION/SHEAR LOADS LISTED IN ICC REPORTS. DO NOT USE
REDUCED SPACING AND EDGE DISTANCE UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE BY THE DETAILS.
5. ANCHORS SHALL BE INSTALLED ACCORDING TO THE ANCHORING SYSTEM'S SPECIFICATIONS. DO NOT DAMAGE REINFORCING STEEL OR OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS. FILL UNUSED HOLES WITH NON-SHRINK GROUT.
6. DRILLED HOLE SHALL BE CLEANED WITH A BRUSH AND CLEAN COMPRESSED AIR IN COMPLIANCE WITH ICC ESR REQUIREMENTS.
7. CONTRACTOR SHALL DETERMINE LOCATION OF EXISTING REINFORCING STEEL PRIOR TO
DRILLING FOR ANCHORS, AND DRILL THE ANCHOR HOLES TO CLEAR THE REINFORCING STEEL PER THESE NOTES. NO REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE NICKED, CUT OR DAMAGED IN ANY WAY.
DAMAGED REINFORCING WILL BE REPLACED BY THE CONTRACTOR AT NO ADDITIONAL COST. IF
THE LOCATION OF ANCHORS MUST BE MOVED SLIGHTLY TO ACCOMMODATE THE LOCATION OF
EXISTING REINFORCING STEEL, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARED A SLIGHTLY MODIFIED
DESIGN OF THE ITEM TO BE ANCHORED AND SUBMIT TO THE ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO FABRICATION. THE MODIFIED DESIGN SUGGESTED BY THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INVOLVE THE
ABSOLUTE MINIMUM RELOCATION OF ANCHORS TO MEET THE DETAILS AND REQUIREMENTS
HEREIN, AND SHALL BE BASED ON A TEMPLATE BY THE CONTRACTOR WHICH ACCURATELY PORTRAYS THE POSITION OF THE ANCHORS.
8. WHILE ANCHORING STEEL MEMBERS AGAINST CONCRETE, PROVIDE LOCK-WASHER AND NUT AT EACH ANCHOR ROD.
CONCRETE SCREW ANCHORS MAY BE HILTI KH-EZ S.S. 316 (ICC ESR-3027), SIMPSON TITEN HD S.S. 316 SCREW ANCHORS (ICC ESR-2713), RED HEAD TAPCON+ SCREW ANCHOR (ICC ESR-3699), OR AN EQUIVALENT PRODUCT ACCEPTABLE TO ENGINEER. AT ENDS OF LATERAL SEISMIC BRACING, USE EXPANSION BOLTS IN LIEU OF SCREW ANCHORS.
TEST POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS IN CONCRETE PER CBC. TENSION-TEST BOLTS TO TWICE
THE ALLOWABLE TENSION VALUE LISTED IN THE APPLICABLE ICC REPORT FOR BOLTS OF THE SAME DIAMETER. TEST 100-PERCENT OF BOLTS USED FOR STRUCTURAL APPLICATIONS. TEST 50-PERCENT OF BOLTS USED FOR NON-STRUCTURAL APPLICATIONS SUCH AS EQUIPMENT ANCHORAGE, INCLUDING HALF OF THE BOLTS IN EACH GROUP. TEST 10-PERCENT OF BOLTS USED FOR SILL-PLATE BOLTING APPLICATIONS.
ALL BOLTS AND ANCHORS (INCLUDING NUTS AND WASHERS) EXPOSED TO WEATHER SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL.
THE EMBEDMENT DEPTH OF POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS SPECIFIED IN THE INDIVIDUAL
DRAWING DETAILS SHALL GOVERN OVER THE MINIMUM EMBEDMENTS SHOWN IN THE TABLES ABOVE. WHERE THE INDIVIDUAL DRAWING DETAIL SPECIFIES A CERTAIN PRODUCT AND THE
CONTRACTOR WISHES TO USE AN ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATIVE PRODUCT, THE EMBEDMENT
DEPTH FOR THAT ALTERNATIVE PRODUCT SHALL BE INCREASED AS REQUIRED BEYOND THE
EMBEDMENT DEPTH SHOWN FOR THE SPECIFIED PRODUCT IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE THE SAME
CAPACITIES IN SHEAR AND TENSION AS PUBLISHED IN THE ICC-ESR REPORT FOR THE PRODUCT AND EMBEDMENT DEPTH SPECIFIED IN THE DETAIL. IF THE EMBEDMENT DEPTH OF
THE ALTERNATIVE PRODUCT MUST BE INCREASED TO MATCH THE CAPACITIES OF THE
PRODUCT SPECIFIED IN THE DETAIL, THE LIMITATION ON CONCRETE THICKNESS SPECIFIED IN THE ICC-ESR REPORT FOR THE ALTERNATIVE PRODUCT MAY NOT BE VIOLATED. THE
EMBEDMENT DEPTH FOR THE ALTERNATIVE PRODUCT MAY NOT BE LESSENED BELOW THE VALUE SHOWN IN THE DETAIL.
9. 10.
11. 12.
19. SOILS AND FOUNDATIONS
1. ALLOWABLE FOUNDATION AND LATERAL PRESSURE TAKEN FROM 2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE TABLE 1806.2 (NO SOILS REPORT).
2. SOIL BEARING CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDATIONS:
A. ALLOWABLE SOIL BEARING PRESSURES
·SPREAD FOOTINGS: 1,500 PSF
·CONTINUOUS FOOTINGS: 1,500 PSF
B. FLAGPOLE-TYPE FOUNDATIONS:
·VERTICAL BEARING PRESSURE: 1,500 PSF
·LATERAL BEARING PRESSURE: 100 PSF/FT
THESE VALUES ARE ALLOWED TO BE INCREASED BY 13 FOR SHORT SEISMIC AND WIND EFFECTS PROVIDED THE LOAD REDUCTION OF 0.75 IS NOT APPLIED TO WIND OR SEISMIC LOAD COMBINATIONS.
4. SCARIFY TOP 12" PRIOR TO TRENCHING FOR THE UTILITY AND/OR FOUNDATION. 90% COMPACTION REPORT IS REQUIRED AT THE TIME OF FOUNDATION INSPECTION. DAMP PROOFING, BASE COURSE AND PRE-SATURATION ARE REQUIRED.
5. EXCAVATION AND COMPACTION SHALL BE APPROVED PRIOR TO PLACING ANY REINFORCING STEEL AND CONCRETE BY A SPECIAL INSPECTOR APPROVED BY CITY OF CARLSBAD. THE IOR TO SUBMIT A LETTER OF COMPLIANCE TO OWNER.
6. FOOTINGS SHALL BE PLACED AND ESTIMATED ACCORDING TO DEPTHS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS.
SHOULD SOIL ENCOUNTERED AT DEPTHS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS NOT BE APPROVED BY THE IOR, FOOTING ELEVATIONS WILL BE ALTERED AS REQUIRED.
7. ALL ABANDONED FOOTINGS, UTILITIES, ETC., THAT INTERFERE WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE REMOVED.
RJ
SS
DS
HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC
DRAFT IMPROVEMENT PLANS - CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISMENT HERITAGE HALL HVAC 30% CD 04/02/24 --
3096 HARDING STREET, CARLSBAD, CA 92008
90% CD 05/10/24 --
1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130
IRVINE, CA. 92606
TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800
IDS
IDS GROUP
Project # 22X006.03
PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/11/24 --
18 GENERAL NOTE
S-001
NAS
NGI
AL
ON
SI
EL
E
RP
O
EFM.
TRE
DE
S
EER
S
IA
OR
FI
AL
L
RA
UT
N
R
GER I
TE
OF C
RTS
U
SAT
C
No. 3930
S
N
AH
AMI
DATE: 10/11/2024
12 19
13 P L A N R E V I E W A P P R O V A L
THESE PLANS/DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN
REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS
CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA AND AMENDED BY THE
JURISDICTION. PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF
DOCUMENTS DOES NOT AUTHORIZE
CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF
ANY FEDERAL, STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.
BY: _________________ DATE: ________________
True North Compliance Services, Inc.
THIS SET OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MUST BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES
AND IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE ANY CHANGES OR
ALTERATIONS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM THE
CITY. OCCUPANCY OF STRUCTURE(S) IS NOT
PERMITTED UNTIL FINAL APPROVAL IS GRANTED
BY ALL APPLICABLE DEPARTMENTS.
Ali Al-Murshid
10/25/24
CBC2024-0329_PLANS_V1 11/6/24
CBC 2022 TABLE 1705.3: REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS OF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
4.INSPECT ANCHORS POST-INSTALLED IN HARDENED
CONCRETE MEMBERSb.
a. ADHESIVE ANCHORS INSTALLED IN HORIZONTAL OR
UPWARDLY INCLINED ORIENTATIONS TO RESIST
SUSTAINED TENSION LOADSc.
b. MECHANICAL ANCHORS AND ADHESIVE NOT DEFINED IN
4.a.
6. PRIOR TO AND DURING CONCRETE PLACEMENT, FABRICATE
SPECIMENS FOR STRENGTH TESTS, PERFORM SLUMP AND
AIR CONTENT TESTS, AND DETERMINE THE TEMPERATURE
OF THE CONCRETE.
7. INSPECT CONCRETE FOR PROPER APPLICATION
TECHNIQUES.
8. VERIFY MAINTENANCE OF SPECIFIED CURING
TEMPERATURE AND TECHNIQUES.
-X
-X
- X
- X
X
X
AWS D1.4,
ACI 318: Ch. 19,
26.4, 26.13.3.2
ACI 318: 26. 3, 26.13,
ACI 506: 3.4
ACI 318: 26.5.3-26.5.5,
26.13.3.3 TYPE
CONTINUOUS
SPECIAL
INSPECTION
PERIODIC
SPECIAL
INSPECTION
REFERENCE
STANDARD a
CBC
REFERENCE
10.INSPECT ERECTION OF PRECAST CONCRETE MEMBERS.
X
X
-
-
ACI 318: 26.10.2,
26.13.1, 26.13.3.21705A.3.4
-
3. INSPECT ANCHORS CAST IN CONCRETE.
9. INSPECT PRESTRESSED CONCRETE FOR:
a. APPLICATION OF PRESTRESSING FORCES, AND
b. GROUTING OF BONDED PRESTRESSING TENDONDS.
X -
X
X
X - 5. VERIFY USE OF REQUIRED DESIGN MIX.
ACI 318: Ch. 26.9,
26.13.1, 26.13.3.3X
--
X
14. INSPECT FORMWORK FOR SHAPE, LOCATION AND
DIMENSIONS OF THE CONCRETE MEMBER BEING FORMED.
a. WHERE APPLICABLE, SEE ALSO CBC SECTION 1705.13.
b. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL INSPECTION SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE RESEARCH REPORT FOR THE ANCHOR ISSUED BY AN APPROVED SOURCE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 17.8.2. IN ACI318 OR OTHER QUALIFICATIONS PROCEDURES. WHERE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS ARE
NOT PROVIDED, SPECIAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS SHALL BE SPECIFIED BY THE REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL AND SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE BUILDING OFFICIAL PRIOR TO THE COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK. c. INSTALLATION OF ALL ADHESIVE ANCHORS IN HORIZONTAL AND UPWARDLY INCLINED POSITION SHALL BE PERFORMED BY AN ACI/CRSI CERTIFIED ADHESIVE ANCHOR INSTALLER, EXCEPT WHERE THE FACTORED DESIGN TENSION ON THE ANCHORS IS LESS THAN 100 POUNDS
AND THOSE ANCHORS ARE CLEARLY NOTED ON THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS OR WHERE THE ANCHORS ARE SHEAR DOWELS ACROSS COLD JOINTS IN SLAB ON GRADE WHERE THE SLAB IS NOT A PART OF THE LATERAL FORCE-RESISTING SYSTEM.
X -
-
ACI 318: 26.13.1.3
ACI 318: 26.13.1.3X
-
-
1. INSPECT AND TEST REINFORCEMENT, INCLUDING
PRESTRESSING TENDONS, AND VERIFY PLACEMENT.
a. REINFORCEMENT IN SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES,
BOUNDARY ELEMENTS OF SPECIAL STRUCTURAL WALLS
AND COUPLING BEAMS.
b. ALL OTHER REINFORCEMENT
ACI 318: Ch. 20, 25.2,
25.3, 25.5.1,
26.6.1–26.6.3, 26.13.1,
26.13.3.2, 26.13.3.3
X
1705A.3.9, 1908A.1,
1910A.2, 1910A.3;
[DSA-SS/CC] 1909.2.4,
1909.2.5, 1909.4.1
2. REINFORCING BAR WELDING:
a. VERIFY WELDABILITY OF REINFORCING BARS OTHER THAN ASTM A706;
b. INSPECT SINGLE-PASS FILLET WELDS, MAXIMUM 516"; NOT DEFINED IN 2.d OR 2.e.
c. INSPECT ALL OTHER WELDS.
d. REINFORCING STEEL RESISTING FLEXURAL AND AXIAL FORCES IN
INTERMEDIATE AND SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES, AND BOUNDARY
ELEMENTS AND COUPLING BEAMS OF SPECIAL STRUCTURAL WALLS OF CONCRETE AND SHEAR REINFORCEMENT.
e. SHEAR REINFORCEMENT.
X
-
-
X
-
-
ACI 318: 18.2.8,
25.5.7, 26.6.4,
26.13.1.4, 26.13.3.2,
26.13.3.3 1705A.3.1,
1903A.8
ACI 318: 17.8.2,
26.7.2, 26.8.2,
26.13.1, 26.13.3.3
-
-
ACI 318: 17.8.2.4
26.7.2, 26.13.1,
26.13.3.2 ACI 318: 17.8.2 26.7.2,
26.13.1, 26.13.3.3
1705A.3.8, 1910A.5,
[DSA-SS/CC] 1909.2.7
1705A.3.8, 1910A.5,
[DSA-SS/CC] 1909.2.7
1903A.5, 1903A.6,
1903A.7, 1904A.1,
1904A.2, 1910A.1,
[OSHPD 1 & 4] 1908A.1,
[DSA-SS/CC] 1909.2.1,
1909.2.2, 1909.2.3
ASTM C31,
ASTM C172,
ACI 318: 26.4, 26.5,
26.12 1705A.3.5, 1705A.3.6,
1705A.3.9, 1905A.1.17,
[DSA-SS/CC] 1909.3.9
1705A.3.9, 1905A.1.15,
1905A.1.16,
[DSA-SS/CC] 1909.3.7,
1909.3.8
11.FOR PRECAST CONCRETE DIAPHRAGM CONNECTIONS OR
REINFORCEMENT AT JOINTS CLASSIFIED AS MODERATE OR
HIGH DEFORMABILITY ELEMENTS (MDE OR HDE) IN
STRUCTURES ASSIGNED TO SEISMIC DESIGN CATE-GORY D,
E OR F, INSPECT SUCH CONNECTIONS AND REINFORCEMENT
IN THE FIELD FOR:
a. INSTALLATION OF THE EMBEDDED PARTS
b. COMPLETION OF THE CONTINUITY OF REINFORCEMENT
ACROSS JOINTS.
c. COMPLETION OF CONNECTIONS IN THE FIELD.
12. INSPECT INSTALLATION TOLERANCES OF PRECAST
CONCRETE DIAPHRAGM CONNECTIONS FOR COMPLIANCE
WITH ACI 550.5.
13. VERIFY IN-SITU CONCRETE STRENGTH, PRIOR TO STRESSING OF
TENDONS IN POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE AND PRIOR TO REMOVAL OF SHORES AND FORMS FROM BEAMS AND STRUCTURAL SLABS.
ACI 318: 26.10.2,
26.11.2, 26.13.3.3 -
-
X
XACI 318: 26.11.1.2(b),
26.13.3.3 ACI 550.5
1908A.3,
[DSA-SS/CC] 1909.4.3
FOR SI: 1 inch = 25.4 mm.
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
ABBREVIATIONS
@AT
&AND
A.B.ANCHOR BOLT
ABV.ABOVE
ADD'L. (ADDL.) ADDITIONAL
ADJ.ADJACENT
ALT.ALTERNATE
ALUM.ALUMINUM
APPRX. (APPROX.) APPROXIMATE(LY)
ARCH.ARCHITECT(URAL)
BLDG.BUILDING
BLKG.BLOCKING
BLW.BELOW
BM.BEAM
B.N.BOUNDARY NAILING
BNDRY.BOUNDARY
B.O.C.BOTTOM OF CONCRETE
B.O.F.BOTTOM OF FOOTING
BOT. (B)BOTTOM
BRCG.BRACING
BRDG.BRIDGE (ING)
BRG.BEARING
BTWN.BETWEEN
CAMB. (C)CAMBER(ED)
CBCCALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE
CANT.CANTILEVER(ED)
C.F.CUBIC FEET (FOOT)
C.I.P.CAST-IN-PLACE
C.I.D.H.CAST-IN-DRILLED HOLE
C.J.CONTROL JOINT;
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
C.L. (℄)CENTER LINE
CLG.CEILING
CLR.CLEAR
COL.COLUMN
CONC.CONCRETE
CONN.CONNECTION
CONST.CONSTRUCTION
CONT.CONTINUOUS
C.P.COMPLETE-
PENETRATION
CTSK.COUNTERSINK
CTR.CENTER(ED)
C.P.CUBIC YARD
dd PENNY NAIL
DBADEFORMED BAR ANCHOR
DBL.DOUBLE
DEPT.DEPARTMENT
D.F.DOUGLAS FIR
DIA. (Ø)DIAMETER
DIAG.DIAGONAL
DIAPH.DIAPHRAGM
DIM.DIMENSION
DN.DOWN
DODITTO (REPEAT)
DWG. (DWGS.) DRAWING(S)
DWL.DOWEL
EA.EACH
E.F.EACH FACE
E.J.EXPANSION JOINT
EL.ELEVATION
ELEC.ELECTRICAL
ELEV.ELEVATOR
EMB.EMBED(MENT)
E.N.EDGE NAIL
ENG.ENGINEER
EQ.EQUAL
EQPT.EQUIPMENT
EQUIV.EQUIVALENT
EXP.EXPANSION
EXIST. (E)EXISTING
EXT.EXTERIOR
FDN.FOUNDATION
FIN.FINISH(ED)
FLR.FLOOR
F.N.FIELD NAIL; FACE NAIL
F.O.C.FACE OF CONCRETE
F.O.M.FACE OF MASONRY
F.O.S.FACE OF STUD
F.O.W.FACE OF WALL
F.P.FULL PENETRATION
FRPFIBER REINFORCED POLYMER
F.S.FAR SIDE
FT. (')FOOT (FEET)
FTG.FOOTING
F.V.FIELD VERIFY
GA.GAUGE
GALV.GALVANIZE(D)
GLB.GLUED LAMINATED BEAM
(GLU-LAM)
GRD.GRADE
GYP.GYPSUM
HD.HOLDOWN; HAND
HDR.HEADER
HGR.HANGER
HORIZ.(H) HORIZONTAL
H.S.HEADED STUD
H.S.B.HIGH STRENGTH BOLT
HT.HEIGHT
I.D.INSIDE DIAMETER
IN.(") INCH(ES)
INFO.INFORMATION
JST.JOIST
JT.JOINT
KKIPS; 1000
K.P.KING POST
LAT.LATERAL
L.B.LAG BOLT
LB (#)POUND
L.F.LINEAL FEET (FOOT)
LLHLONG LEG HORIZONTAL
LLVLONG LEG VERTICAL
LT.WT.LIGHT WEIGHT
MAX.MAXIMUM
M.B.MACHINE BOLT
MECH.MECHANICAL
M.E.P.MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL
AND PLUMBING
MEZZ.MEZZANINE
MFR.MANUFACTURER
MIN.MINIMUM
MISC.MISCELLANEOUS
MTL.METAL
(N)NEW
N.O.(#) NUMBER
N.S.NEAR SIDE
N.T.S.NOT TO SCALE
O/C (O.C.)ON CENTER
O.D.OUTSIDE DIAMETER
O.H.OPPOSITE HAND
OPNG.OPENING
OPP.OPPOSITE
ORTH.ORTHOGONAL
O.W.J.OPEN WEB JOIST
PCPILE CAP
PCFPOUNDS PER CU.FT.
PL.PLATE
PLYWD.PLYWOOD
P.P.PARTIAL-
PENETRATION
P.S.F.POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT
P.S.I.POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH
PTPRETENSIONED
P.T.PRESSURE TREATED
QTY.QUANTITY
RAD.(R) RADIUS
RBSREDUCED BEAM SECTION
REF.REFERENCE
REINF.REINFORCEMENT (ING)
REQ'D. (REQD.) REQUIRED
RF.ROOF
R.O.ROUGH OPENING
S.A.D.SEE ARCHITECTURAL
DRAWINGS
SCSLIP-CRITICAL
S.C.D.SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS
SCH.SCHEDULE
SEP.SEPARATION
SHT.SHEET
SIM.SIMILAR
SKW.SKEW(ED)
S..G.SLAB-ON-GRADE
SPEC.SPECIFICATION
SQ.SQUARE
STSNUG-TIGHTENED
STD.STANDARD
STAGG.STAGGER(ED)
STIFF.STIFFENER
STIR.STIRRUP
STL.STEEL
STRUC(T).STRUCTURAL
SUSP.SUSPENDED
SYMM.SYMMETRICAL
T&BTOP AND BOTTOM
T>ONGUE AND GROOVE
TEMP.TEMPORARY
THK.THICK(NESS)
T.N.TOE NAIL
T.O.TOP OF
T.O.C.TOP OF CONCRETE
T.O.S.TOP OF STEEL;
TOP OF SHEATHING
T.O.W.TOP OF WALL
TRANS.TRANSVERSE
T.S.G.TAPERED STEEL GIRDER
TYP.TYPICAL
U.N.O.UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
UTL.UTILITY
VERT. (V) VERTICAL
V.I.F.VERIFY IN FIELD
W/WITH
(W)WIDE; WIDTH
WD.WOOD
W.P.WORK POINT
WT.WEIGHT
W.W.F.WELDED WIRE FABRIC
X-STGEXTRA STRONG
XX-STGDOUBLE EXTRA STRONG
STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION PROGRAM
1. 2.
3. 4.
5. 6.
7. 8.
9. 10.
STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION IS REQUIRED FOR THE STRUCTURAL SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CBC 2022, SECTION 1704.6. STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION IS THE VISUAL OBSERVATION AT THE
CONSTRUCTION SITE OF THE ELEMENTS AND CONNECTIONS OF THE STRUCTURAL SYSTEM AT
SIGNIFICANT CONSTRUCTION STAGES, AND THE COMPLETE STRUCTURE FOR GENERAL CONFORMANCE TO THE APPROVED PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION DOES NOT INCLUDE OR WAIVE THE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE INSPECTIONS IN SECTION 110 OR THE SPECIAL INSPECTIONS IN 1705 OR OTHER SECTIONS OF THIS CODE.
THE OWNER SHALL EMPLOY A STATE OF CALIFORNIA REGISTERED CIVIL OR STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OR LICENSED ARCHITECT TO PERFORM THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION. THE CITY OF
CARLSBAD DEPARTMENT OF BUILDING AND SAFETY REQUIRES THE USE OF THE ENGINEER
OR ARCHITECT, OR HIS/HER DESIGNEE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE STRUCTURAL DESIGN WHO ARE INDEPENDENT OF THE CONTRACTOR.
NAME OF SE: RAMI ELHASAN
THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER SHALL PROVIDE EVIDENCE OF EMPLOYMENT BY THE OWNER OR THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. A LETTER FROM THE OWNER, THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE,
OR A COPY OF THE AGREEMENT FOR SERVICES SHALL BE SENT TO THE BUILDING INSPECTOR BEFORE THE FIRST SITE VISIT.
THE OWNER OR OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE SHALL COORDINATE AND CALL FOR A MEETING
BETWEEN THE ENGINEER OR ARCHITECT RESPONSIBLE FOR THE STRUCTURAL DESIGN,
STRUCTURAL OBSERVER, CONTRACTOR, AFFECTED SUBCONTRACTORS AND DEPUTY INSPECTORS. THE PURPOSE OF THE MEETING SHALL BE TO IDENTIFY THE MAJOR STRUCTURAL
ELEMENTS AND CONNECTIONS THAT AFFECT THE VERTICAL AND LATERAL LOAD SYSTEMS OF THE STRUCTURE AND TO REVIEW SCHEDULING OF THE REQUIRED OBSERVATIONS. A RECORD OF THE
MEETING SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE FIRST OBSERVATION REPORT SUBMITTED TO THE BUILDING INSPECTOR.
THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER SHALL PERFORM SITE VISITS AT THOSE STEPS IN THE PROGRESS
OF THE WORK THAT ALLOW FOR CORRECTION OF DEFICIENCIES WITHOUT SUBSTANTIAL EFFORT OR UNCOVERING OF THE WORK INVOLVED. AT A MINIMUM, THE LISTED SIGNIFICANT CONSTRUCTION STAGES ON THE "STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION/SIGNIFICANT CONSTRUCTION STAGES" FORM REQUIRE A SITE VISIT AND AN OBSERVATION REPORT FROM THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER.
THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER SHALL PREPARE A REPORT OF THE "STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION REPORT FORM" FOR EACH SIGNIFICANT STAGE OF CONSTRUCTION OBSERVED. THE ORIGINAL OF
THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION REPORT SHALL BE SENT TO THE BUILDING INSPECTOR'S OFFICE
AND SHALL BE SIGNED AND SEALED (WET STAMP) BY THE RESPONSIBLE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER OF RECORD. ONE COPY OF THE OBSERVATION REPORT SHALL BE ATTACHED TO THE APPROVED PLANS. THE COPY ATTACHED TO THE PLANS SHALL BE SIGNED AND SEALED (WET STAMP) BY THE RESPONSIBLE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER OR THEIR DESIGNEE. COPIES OF THE REPORT SHALL ALSO BE GIVEN TO THE OWNER, CONTRACTOR, AND DEPUTY INSPECTOR. ANY DEFICIENCY
NOTED ON THE OBSERVATION REPORT WILL BECOME THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE STRUCTURAL
ENGINEER OR ARCHITECT OF RECORD TO VERIFY ITS COMPLETION BY THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER.
A FINAL OBSERVATION REPORT MUST BE SUBMITTED WHICH SHOWS THAT ALL OBSERVED
DEFICIENCIES WERE RESOLVED AND STRUCTURAL SYSTEM GENERALLY CONFORMS WITH THE APPROVED PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. THE CITY OF CARLSBAD DEPARTMENT OF
BUILDING SAFETY WILL NOT ACCEPT THE STRUCTURAL WORK WITHOUT THE FINAL OBSERVATION
REPORT AND THE CORRECTION OF SPECIFIC DEFICIENCIES NOTED DURING NORMAL BUILDING INSPECTION.
THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER OF RECORD SHALL PROVIDE THE ORIGINAL STAMPED AND SIGNED "STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION REPORT FORM" TO THE THE CITY OF CARLSBAD DEPARTMENT OF BUILDING AND SAFETY BUILDING INSPECTOR.
THE ENGINEER OR ARCHITECT OF RECORD SHALL DEVELOP ALL CHANGES RELATING TO THE STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS. THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT SHALL REVIEW AND APPROVE ALL CHANGES
TO THE APPROVED PLANS AND APPROVE ALL CHANGES TO THE APPROVED PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS.
AT THE CONCLUSION OF THE WORK INCLUDED IN THE PERMIT, THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER OF
RECORD SHALL SUBMIT TO THE BUILDING OFFICIAL A WRITTEN STATEMENT THAT THE SITE VISITS
HAVE BEEN MADE AND IDENTIFY ANY REPORTED DEFICIENCIES THAT, TO THE BEST OF THE STRUCTURAL OBSERVER'S KNOWLEDGE HAVE NOT BEEN RESOLVED.
CONSTRUCTION STAGE ELEMENTS / CONNECTIONS TO BE OBSERVED; A. CONCTRE PAD: DEPTH AND WIDTH OF FOOTINGS; REINFORCING PLACEMENT, SIZE AND GRADE OF REINFORCING STEEL.
NOTE:
1. THE SPECIAL INSPECTION SHALL BE PERFORMED BY CERTIFIED DEPUTY INSPECTORS.
2. THE TEST OF SOIL AND CONCRETE SHALL BE PERPORMED BY AN APPROVED LABORATORY.
3. THE CERTIFIED DEPUTY INSPECTORS AND THE APPROVED LABORATORY SHALL BE HIRED BY THE OWNER OR THE PROJECT CONSULTANT AND NOT THE CONTRACTOR.
1. STRUCTURAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS SHALL BE ACCORDING TO 2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE AMD, PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS.
2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THE WORK AND SCHEDULE WITH THE OWNERS
INSPECTOR TO ASSURE THAT ADEQUATE NOTICE IS GIVEN FOR INSPECTION TO OCCUR WHILE MAINTAINING PROJECT SCHEDULE.
3. CONTINUOUS OR PERIODIC INSPECTION BY THE PROJECT OR SPECIAL INSPECTOR HIRED BY THE OWNER ARE REQUIRED FOR THE FOLLOWING TYPES OF WORK WHERE OCCURS:
A. POST-INSTALLED ANCHOR IN CONCRETE
4. THE TESTING TORQUES FOR POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS SHALL BE BASED ON THE
MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION TORQUE AS APPROVED IN AN ICC-ES EVALUATION REPORT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. (CONFORM TO REQUIREMENTS OF CBC 2022, SECTION 1901.3.4.4).
5. THE TESTING FORCES FOR POST-INSTALLED ADHESIVE ANCHORS SHALL BE BASED ON ONE AND A QUARTER (1¼) TIMES THE MAXIMUM DESIGN STRENGTH OF ANCHORS AS PROVIDED IN
AN APPROVED TEST REPORT USING CRITERIA ADOPTED IN THIS CODE OR DETERMINED IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPENDIX D OF ACI 318. TENSION TEST LOAD NEED NOT EXCEED 80 PERCENT OF THE NOMINAL YIELD STRENGTH OF THE ANCHOR ELEMENT (=0.8Asefya). (CONFORM TO REQUIREMENTS OF CBC 2022, SECTION 1901.3.4.4)
6. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR POST INSTALLED ANCHORS SHALL BE BASED ON ICC-ESR OR MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTION. FIELD TEST SHALL SATISFY THE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS PER CBC 2022, SECTION 1901.3.4.3 AND 1901.3.4.5.
7. ALL SPECIAL/DEPUTY INSPECTION REPORTS AND TESTS SHALL INCLUDE: JOB NAME AND JOB NUMBER, SITE LOCATION, PLAN PAGE AND DETAILS, ANY RFI, AND CODE REFERENCES.
STRUCTURAL TEST AND INSPECTION
RJ
SS
DS
HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC
DRAFT IMPROVEMENT PLANS - CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISMENT HERITAGE HALL HVAC 30% CD 04/02/24 --
3096 HARDING STREET, CARLSBAD, CA 92008
90% CD 05/10/24 --
1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130
IRVINE, CA. 92606
TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800
IDS
IDS GROUP
Project # 22X006.03
PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/11/24 --
18 GENERAL NOTE
S-002
NAS
NGI
AL
ON
SI
EL
E
RP
O
EFM.
TRE
DE
S
EER
S
IA
OR
FI
AL
L
RA
UT
N
R
GER I
TE
OF C
RTS
U
SAT
C
No. 3930
S
N
AH
AMI
DATE: 10/11/2024
13 19
14 P L A N R E V I E W A P P R O V A L
THESE PLANS/DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN
REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS
CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA AND AMENDED BY THE
JURISDICTION. PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF
DOCUMENTS DOES NOT AUTHORIZE
CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF
ANY FEDERAL, STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.
BY: _________________ DATE: ________________
True North Compliance Services, Inc.
THIS SET OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MUST BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES
AND IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE ANY CHANGES OR
ALTERATIONS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM THE
CITY. OCCUPANCY OF STRUCTURE(S) IS NOT
PERMITTED UNTIL FINAL APPROVAL IS GRANTED
BY ALL APPLICABLE DEPARTMENTS.
Ali Al-Murshid
10/25/24
CBC2024-0329_PLANS_V1 11/6/24
WOOD
1. WOOD MEMBERS SHALL BE DOUGLAS FIR-LARCH PER WCLIB OR WWPA, VISUALLY GRADED DIMENSION LUMBER AND SHALL BE SURFACED DRY (19% MOISTURE CONTENT MAXIMUM). ALL
LUMBER SHALL BEAR THE GRADE STAMP OF AN APPROVED TESTING AGENCY, EXCEPT EXPOSED LUMBER AT VISIBLE AREAS. STRUCTURAL FRAMING MEMBERS SHALL BE S4S AND GRADE MARKED AS No.1.
2. PLYWOOD SHEATHING SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE LATEST EDITION OF U.S. PRODUCT STANDARDS PS 1-95. STRUCTURAL USE PANELS SHALL CONFORM TO NER-108 (APA-PRP-108). EACH PANEL SHALL BE IDENTIFIED WITH THE APPROPRIATE A.P.A. GRADE STAMP.
3. ROOF SHEATHING SHALL BE FIVE PLY WITH THICKNESS AND PANEL INDEX AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. STAGGER SHEETS PER PLAN. ROOF NAILING SHALL BE PER SCHEDULE ON DRAWINGS.
OR AS INDICATED ON NOTES. INSTALL SHEETS WITH FACE GRAIN ACROSS SUPPORTS EXCEPT WHERE NOTED OTHERWISE.
4. ROOF AND FLOOR SHEATHING, AND SHEAR WALL PANELS NAILING AND INSTALLATION SHALL BE INSPECTED AND APPROVED PRIOR TO COVERING.
5. BOLTS SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A307. ALL BOLTS THROUGH WOOD SHALL HAVE STANDARD WASHERS. BOLT HOLES SHALL BE BORED 132" TO 116" LARGER THAN THE BOLT DIAMETER UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. ALL BOLTS SHALL BE TIGHTENED PRIOR TO BEING COVERED.
WHERE PLATE WASHERS ARE SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS THEY SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:
6. NAILS SHALL BE COMMON WIRE NAILS (0.131"Øx2-1/2" FOR 8d; 0.148"Øx3" FOR 10d; 0.148"Øx3-1/4" FOR 12d; 0.162"Øx3-1/2" FOR 16d) OR ACCESSORIES OF HARDWARE CONNECTORS. SEE CBC FOR MINIMUM NAILING SCHEDULE AT CONNECTIONS.
7. HARDWARE CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES SHALL BE SIMPSON STRONG-TIE CONNECTORS OR APPROVED EQUAL.
8. NONBEARING PARTITIONS SHALL BE MINIMUM 2x4 STUD AT MAXIMUM 16" ON CENTER WITH TOP AND SILL PLATES AS SHOWN IN THE APPLICABLE DETAILS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
9. PLYWOOD NAILING SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM EDGE DISTANCE OF 3/8". NAIL HEADS SHALL BE FLUSH WITH TOP SURFACE OF PLYWOOD; SINKING NAIL HEADS IS PROHIBITED.
10. PROVIDE PLYWOOD EDGE NAILING AROUND THE PLYWOOD OPENINGS AND ALONG THE FULL HEIGHT OF ALL WOOD POSTS AND COLUMNS.
11. LAG SCREWS SHALL BE SCREWED, NOT DRIVEN, INTO WOOD MEMBERS WITH PRE-DRILLED HOLES.
PRE-DRILLED HOLE DIAMETER IN SOFT STRUCTURAL WOODS SHALL EQUAL SCREW SHANK DIAMETER AT THE SCREW SHANK, AND SHALL BE UNDERSIZED BY 25% OF SCREW DIAMETER AT THE SCREW THREADS. FOR EXAMPLE, FOR A 3/8” SCREW, THE PRE-DRILLED HOLE SHALL BE 3/8” OVER THE LENGTH OF THE SCREW SHANK, AND SHALL BE 9/32” OVER THE LENGTH OF THE SCREW THREADS. FOR HARD WOODS USED IN A STRUCTURAL APPLICATION, PRE-DRILLED HOLE DIAMETER AT
THE SHANK SHALL MATCH THE SCREW DIAMETER, AND THE HOLE DIAMETER OVER THE LENGTH OF THE SCREW THREADS SHALL BE UNDERSIZED BY 12.5% OF THE SCREW DIAMETER.
12. SILL PLATES IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH CONCRETE, MASONRY, OR EARTH, SHALL BE PRESSURE TREATED WOOD OR APPROVED EQUAL. PRESSURE TREATED WOOD SHALL BE TREATED WITH ALKALINE COPPER QUAT (ACQ-C AND ACQ-D), CARBONATE AZOLE (CBA-A), OR COPPER AZOLE (CA-B).
13. PROVIDE DOUBLE OR 4x FLOOR JOIST UNDER PARALLEL, NON-BEARING PARTITION WALL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
14. PROVIDE LAMINATED DOUBLE STUDS UNDER EACH SUPPORT OF BEAMS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
15. SOLID BLOCKING SHALL BE PLACED BETWEEN JOISTS AT POINTS OF SUPPORT AND POINTS WHERE SHEATHING IS DISCONTINUOUS.
16. APPLY ADHESIVE TO CONTACT SURFACES BETWEEN HORIZONTAL PLYWOOD SHEATHING AND SUPPORTING WOOD MEMBER.
17. WOOD MEMBER WITH WANE SHALL NOT BE LOCATED AT PLYWOOD JOINT.
18. NO STRUCTURAL MEMBER SHALL BE CUT WITHOUT THE APPROVAL OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER.
19. HARDWARE CONNECTING WOOD MEMBERS SHALL BE RECESSED WHEN REQUIRED BY ARCHITECTURAL FINISH. VERIFY WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS.
20. 1/4"x3"x3" STEEL PLATE WASHERS (OR SIMPSON BP) SHALL BE USED FOR ALL SILL PLATE ANCHOR BOLTS AND HOLDOWN CONNECTOR BOLTS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. SIMPSON BP SHALL BE PROTECTED WITH ZMAX (G185) COATING.
21. ALL BOLTS SHALL BE RE-TIGHTENED JUST PRIOR TO BEING COVERED.
22. BOLT HOLES AT WOOD MEMBERS SHALL NOT BE MORE THAN 1/16" LARGER THAN THE BOLT DIAMETER.
23. ALL HARDWARE AND FASTENERS IN CONTACT WITH TREATED WOOD SILL PLATES SHALL BE ZINC- COATED. ALL NAILS INTO TREATED SILL PLATES SHALL BE HOT-DIPPED ZINC-COATED GALVANIZED OR SIMPSON ZMAX (G185) COATED NAILS.
24. SOLID BLOCKING OR EQUIVALENT CROSS-BRIDGING SHALL BE INSTALLED BETWEEN ALL ROOF AND FLOOR JOISTS AT THE SPACING PER CODE.
25. FIRE BLOCKING SHALL BE INSTALLED BETWEEN ALL WALL STUDS IF REQUIRED BY CODE.
MINIMUM SIZE FOR SQUARE PLATE WASHERS
BOLT SIZEPLATE SIZE
12"14" x 3" x 3"
58"14" x 3" x 3"
34"516" x 3" x 3"
78"516" x 3" x 3"
1"38" x 312" x 312"
1. JOIST TO SILL OR GIRDER3 - 8d COMMON (2 1/2" x 0.131")TOENAIL
2. BRIDGING TO JOIST2 - 8d COMMON (2 1/2" x 0.131")TOENAIL EACH END
3. 1"x 6" SUBFLOOR OR LESS TO EACH JOIST2 - 8d COMMON (2 1/2" x 0.131")FACE NAIL
4. WIDER THAN 1" x 6" SUBFLOOR TO EACH JOIST3 - 8d COMMON (2 1/2" x 0.131")FACE NAIL
5. 2" SUBFLOOR TO JOIST OR GIRDER2 - 16d COMMON (3 1/2" x 0.162")BLIND AND FACE NAIL
6. SOLE PLATE TO JOIST OR BLOCKING16d (3 1/2" x 0.135") AT 16" O.C.TYPICAL FACE NAIL SOLE PLATE TO JOIST OR BLOCKING AT3 - 16d (3 1/2" x 0.135") AT 16" O.C.BRACED WALL
PANELS BRACED WALL PANEL
7. TOP PLATE TO STUD2 - 16d COMMON (3 1/2" x 0.162")END NAIL
8. STUD TO SOLE PLATE4 - 8d COMMON (2 1/2" x 0.131")TOENAIL 2 - 16d COMMON (3 1/2" x 0.162")END NAIL
9. DOUBLE STUDS16d (3 1/2" x 0.135") AT 24" O.C.FACE NAIL
10. DOUBLE TOP PLATES16d (3 1/2" x 0.135") AT 24" O.C.TYPICAL FACE NAIL DOUBLE TOP PLATES8 - 16d COMMON (3 1/2" x 0.162")LAP SPLICE
11. BLOCKING BETWEEN JOIST OR RAFTER TO TOP PLATE3 - 8d COMMON (2 1/2" x 0.131")TOENAIL
12. RIM JOIST TO TOP PLATE8d (2 1/2" x 0.131") AT 6" O.C.TOENAIL
13. TOP PLATES, LAPS AND INTERSECTIONS2 - 16d COMMON (3 1/2" x 0.162")FACE NAIL
14. CONTINUOUS HEADER, TWO PIECES16d COMMON (3 1/2" x 0.162")16" O.C. ALONG EDGE
15. CEILING JOISTS TO PLATE3 - 8d COMMON (2 1/2" x 0.131")TOENAIL
16. CONTINUOUS HEADER TO STUD4 - 8d COMMON (2 1/2" x 0.131")TOENAIL
17. CEILING JOISTS, LAPS OVER PARTITIONS3 - 16d COMMON (3 1/2" x 0.162") MINIMUM, FACE NAIL (SEE SECTION 2308.10.4.1, TABLE 2308.10.4.1)TABLE 2308.10.4.1
18. CEILING JOISTS TO PARALLEL RAFTERS3 - 16d COMMON (3 1/2" x 0.162") MINIMUM, FACE NAIL (SEE SECTION 2308.10.4.1, TABLE 2308.10.4.1)TABLE 2308.10.4.1
19. RAFTER TO PLATE
(SEE SECTION 2308.10.1, TABLE 2308.10.1)3 - 8d COMMON (2 1/2" x 0.131")TOENAIL
20. 1" DIAGONAL BRACE TO EACH STUD AND PLATE2 - 8d COMMON (2 1/2" x 0.131")FACE NAIL
21. 1" x 8" SHEATHING TO EACH BEARING3 - 8d COMMON (2 1/2" x 0.131")FACE NAIL
22. WIDER THAN 1" x 8" SHEATHING TO EACH BEARING3 - 8d COMMON (2 1/2" x 0.131")FACE NAIL
23. BUILT-UP CORNER STUDS16d COMMON (3 1/2" x 0.162")24" O.C.
24. BUILT-UP GIRDER AND BEAMS20d COMMON (4" x 0.192") AT 32" O.C.FACE NAIL AT TOP AND
BOTTOM STAGGERED ON
OPPISITE SIDES
2 - 20d COMMON (4" X 0.192")FACE NAIL AT ENDS AND
AT EACH SPLICE
25. 2" PLANKS16d COMMON (3 1/2" x 0.162")AT EACH BEARING 26 . COLLAR TIE TO RAFTER3 - 10d COMMON (3" x 0.148")FACE NAIL
27. JACK RAFTER TO HIP3 - 10d COMMON (3" x 0.148")TOE NAIL 2 - 16d COMMON (3 1/2" x 0.162")FACE NAIL
28. ROOF RAFTER TO 2-BY RIDGE BEAM2 - 16d COMMON (3 1/2" x 0.162")TOE NAIL 2 - 16d COMMON (3 1/2" x 0.162")FACE NAIL
29. JOIST TO BAND JOIST3 - 16d COMMON (3 1/2" x 0.162")FACE NAIL
30. LEDGER STRIP3 - 16d COMMON (3 1/2" x 0.162")FACE NAIL AT EACH JOIST
31. WOOD STRUCTURAL PANELS AND PARTICILEBOARD ᵇ1/2" AND LESS 6dc,1 SUBFLOOR, ROOF AND WALL SHEATHING -19/32" TO 3/4" 8dd OR 6de (TO FRAMING)7/8" TO 1" 10dd
1 1/8" TO 1 1/4" 10dd OR 8de
SINGLE FLOOR (COMBINATION SUBFLOOR -3/4" AND LESS 6de
UNDERLAYMENT TO FRAMING)7/8" TO 1"8de
1 1/8" TO 1 1/4" 10dOR 8de
32. PANEL SIDING (TO FRAMING)1/2" AND LESS 6df
5/8"8df
33. FIBERBOARDING SHEATHINGᵍ1/2"6d COMMON NAIL
(2" x 0.113")
25/32"8d COMMON NAIL
(2" x 0.113")
34. INTERIOR PANELING1/4"4dj
3/8"6dk
CONNECTIONFASTENINGa, mLOCATION
NAILING SCHEDULE
FOOTNOTES:
a. COMMON NAILS ARE PERMITTED TO BE USED EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE STATED. b. NAILS SPACED AT 6 INCHES ON CENTER AT EDGES, 12 INCHES AT INTERMIDIATE SUPPORTS EXCEPT 6 INCHES AT SUPPORTS WHERE SPANS ARE 48 INCHES OR MORE. FOR NAILING OF WOOD
STRUCTURAL PANEL AND PARTICLEBOARD DAPHRAGMS AND SHEAR WALLS, REFER TO SECTION 2305. NAILS FOR WALL SHEATHIING ARE PERMITTED TO BE COMMON, BOX OR CASING. c. COMMON OR DEFORMED SHANK (6d - 2" x 0.113"; 8d - 21/2" x 0.131"; 10d - 3" x 0.148"). d. COMMON (6d - 2" x 0.113"; 8d - 2 1/2" x 0.131"; 10d - 3 x 0.148"). e. DEFORMED SHANK (6d - 2" x 0.113"; 8d - 2 1/2" x 0.131"; 10d - 3" X 0.148"). f. CORROSION-RESISTANT SIDING (6d - 17/8" x 0.106"; 8d - 2 3/8" x 0.128") OR CASING (6d - 2" x 0.099"; 8d - 2 1/2" x 0.113") NAIL.
g. FASTENERS SPACED 3 INCHES ON CENTER AT EXTERIOR EDGES AND 6 INCHES ON CENTER AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS, WHEN USED AS STRUCTURAL SHEATHING. SPACING SHALL BE 6 INCHES ON CENTER ON THE EDGES AND 12 INCHES ON CENTER AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL APPLICATIONS.
h. CORROSION-RESISTANT ROOFING NAILS WITH 7/16-INCH -DIAMETER HEAD AND 1 1/2-INCH LENGTH FOR 1/2-INCH SHEATHING AND 13/4-INCH LENGTH FOR 25/32-INCH SHEATHING. i. CORROSION-RESISTANT STAPLES WITH NOMINAL 7/16-INCH CROWN OR 1-INCH CROWN AND 11/4-INCH LENGTH FOR 1/2-INCH SHEATHING AND 1 1/2-INCH LENGTH FOR 25/32-INCH SHEATHING. PANEL SUPPORTS AT 16 INCHES (20 INCHES IF STRENGTH AXIS IN THE LONG DIRECTION OF THE PANEL, UNLESS OTHERWISE MARKED).
j. CASING (1 1/2" x 0.080") OR FINISH (1 1/2" X 0.072") NAILS SPACED 6 INCHES ON PANEL EDGES, 12 INCHES AT INTEREDIATE SUPPORTS.
k. PANEL SUPPORTS AT 24 INCHES. CASING OR FINISH NAILS SPACED 6 INCHES ON PANEL EDGES, 12 INCHES AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS.
l. FOR ROOF SHEATHING APPLICATIONS, 8d NAILS (2 1/2" x 0.113") ARE THE MINIMUM REQUIRED FOR WOOD STRUCTURAL PANELS.
m. STAPLES SHALL HAVE A MINIM CROWN WIDTH OF 7/16 INCH. n. FOR ROOF SHEATHING APPLICATIONS, FASTENERS SPACED 4 INCHES ON CENTER AT EDGES, 8 INCHES AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS.
o. FASTENERS SPACED 4 INCHES ON CENTER AT EDGES, 8 INCHES AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS FOR SUBFLOOR AND WALL SHEATHING AND 3 INCHES ON CENTER AT EDGES, 6 INCHES AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS FOR ROOF SHEATHING.
p. FASTENERS SPACED 4 INCHES ON CENTER AT EDGES, 8 INCHES AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. q. CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH CBC SECTION 2308.10.
RJ
SS
DS
HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC
DRAFT IMPROVEMENT PLANS - CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISMENT HERITAGE HALL HVAC 30% CD 04/02/24 --
3096 HARDING STREET, CARLSBAD, CA 92008
90% CD 05/10/24 --
1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130
IRVINE, CA. 92606
TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800
IDS
IDS GROUP
Project # 22X006.03
PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/11/24 --
18 GENERAL NOTE
S-003
NAS
NGI
AL
ON
SI
EL
E
RP
O
EFM.
TRE
DE
S
EER
S
IA
OR
FI
AL
L
RA
UT
N
R
GER I
TE
OF C
RTS
U
SAT
C
No. 3930
S
N
AH
AMI
DATE: 10/11/2024
14 19
15 P L A N R E V I E W A P P R O V A L
THESE PLANS/DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN
REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS
CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA AND AMENDED BY THE
JURISDICTION. PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF
DOCUMENTS DOES NOT AUTHORIZE
CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF
ANY FEDERAL, STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.
BY: _________________ DATE: ________________
True North Compliance Services, Inc.
THIS SET OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MUST BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES
AND IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE ANY CHANGES OR
ALTERATIONS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM THE
CITY. OCCUPANCY OF STRUCTURE(S) IS NOT
PERMITTED UNTIL FINAL APPROVAL IS GRANTED
BY ALL APPLICABLE DEPARTMENTS.
Ali Al-Murshid
10/25/24
CBC2024-0329_PLANS_V1 11/6/24
6x8 @ 6'-0" O.C.6x8 @ 6'-0" O.C.6x8 @ 6'-0" O.C.6x8 @ 6'-0" O.C.6x8 @ 6'-0" O.C.6x8 @ 6'-0" O.C. 2x4 @ 16" O.C.
(E) 4x GLU-LAM ARCH
(E) 4x GLU-LAM ARCH
(E) 4x GLU-LAM ARCH
(E) 4x GLU-LAM ARCH
(E) 4x GLU-LAM ARCH
(E) 4x GLU-LAM ARCH
TYP. F.V.
CO2T
T CO2
1 1/8"=1'-0" ROOF PLAN
±9'-0" F.V.±13'-6" F.V.±13'-6" F.V.±9'-0" F.V.
±20'-6" F.V.±14'-0" F.V.±14'-0" F.V.±14'-0" F.V.±14'-0" F.V.±14'-0" F.V.±14'-0" F.V.±15'-0" F.V.±2'-6" F.V. 3 1/4"=1'-0" ENLARGED ROOF FRAMING PLAN
2 1/4"=1'-0" ENLARGED ROOF FRAMING PLAN
4 1/2"=1'-0" PARTIAL FOUNDATION PLAN
A
12345
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
HP
1 HP
2 HP
3 HP
4 6x8 @ 6'-0" O.C.
RJ
SS
DS
HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC
DRAFT IMPROVEMENT PLANS - CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISMENT HERITAGE HALL HVAC 30% CD 04/02/24 --
3096 HARDING STREET, CARLSBAD, CA 92008
90% CD 05/10/24 --
1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130
IRVINE, CA. 92606
TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800
IDS
IDS GROUP
Project # 22X006.03
PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/11/24 --
18 ROOF PLAN
S-201
TRUE
NORTH
N
(E)2-2x10 F.V.
±9'-0" F.V.
(E)2-2x10 F.V.
(E)2-2x10 F.V.
(E)2-2x10 F.V.
GR-2 UNIT MAX WT. = 50
SEE DET.
5 M501
±13'-6" F.V.±13'-6"±13'-6" F.V.
±20'-6" F.V.
5 M501
(E) 2X BEARING WALL
1 S-503
TYP
3 -
2 -
FC-2 UNIT MAX.
WT. 200 LBS.
1 S-502
1 S-503TYP.
4 -
12345
A
B
6X8 ROOF BEAM
PER
16 S-502
(E) 2X4 @
16"O.C.
4X6 BLOCKING AS
REQ'D. TYP VERIFY
LOCATION ON SITE
(E) 2X4 @ 16"O.C.
F.V.
FC-1 UNIT MAX.
WT. 200 LBS.
1 S-502
MEP DUCT VERT.
HANGER AND
KICKER BELOW
PER
11 S-502
6" OFFSET
MEP DUCT VERT.
HANGER AND
KICKER BELOW
PER
10 S-502
TYP
MEP DUCT VERT.
HANGER AND
KICKER BELOW
PER
9 S-502
TYP
MEP DUCT VERT.
HANGER AND
KICKER
PER
8 S-502
TYP
(E) 2X BEARING WALL
18"Ø DUCT PER
MEP DRAWING
FC-4 UNIT MAX.
WT. 200 LBS.
SEE
1 S-502
16"Ø DUCT PER
MEP DRAWING (E) 2X BEARING WALL
1 C
±14'-0" F.V.
C
(N) CONCRETE PAD
PER
6 S-501
TYP
HP-4 MAX WT = 311
LBS. SEE
1 M501
HP-3 MAX WT = 311
LBS. SEE
1 M501
(E) FOOTING
(E) 4" INTERIOR
S.O.G.
(E) 2x6
BLK'G.
34 I
H
±15'-0" F.V.
±13'-6"
2 ±13'-6" F.V.
(E) CONT FTG.
8'-712"
2'-512"
6"3'-33 4"1'-0"3'-33 4"6"
6"1'-512"12'-0"
(E) 4x GLU-LAM ARCH
(E) 2X6 @ 16" O.C.
EXTERIOR BEARING
WALL TYP. F.V.
(E) CONC. PILASTER.
TYP F.V.
6x8
6x8
6x8
(E) 6x8
(E) 6x8
(E) 6x8
(E) 6x8
(E) 2x6 BEARING
WALL
(E) 2x6 @ 16" O.C.
FC-4 UNIT MAX.
WT. 200 LBS.
SEE
1 S-502
TYP. F.V.
(E) 2x6 @ 16" O.C.
TYP. F.V.
(E) 2x6 @ 16" O.C.
TYP. F.V.
(E) 2x6 @ 16" O.C.
TYP. F.V.
GR-1 UNIT MAX WT. = 50
SEE DET.
NOTE:
- CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND MEMBERS SIZE & SPACING PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION.
NOTE:
- CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND MEMBERS SIZE & SPACING PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION.
(E) CONCRETE SITE
WALK TO REMAIN
(E) 2x6 BLK'G
NAS
NGI
AL
ON
SI
EL
E
RP
O
EFM.
TRE
DE
S
EER
S
IA
OR
FI
AL
L
RA
UT
N
R
GER I
TE
OF C
RTS
U
SAT
C
No. 3930
S
N
AH
AMI
DATE: 10/11/2024
15 19
16 P L A N R E V I E W A P P R O V A L
THESE PLANS/DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN
REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS
CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA AND AMENDED BY THE
JURISDICTION. PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF
DOCUMENTS DOES NOT AUTHORIZE
CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF
ANY FEDERAL, STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.
BY: _________________ DATE: ________________
True North Compliance Services, Inc.
THIS SET OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MUST BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES
AND IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE ANY CHANGES OR
ALTERATIONS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM THE
CITY. OCCUPANCY OF STRUCTURE(S) IS NOT
PERMITTED UNTIL FINAL APPROVAL IS GRANTED
BY ALL APPLICABLE DEPARTMENTS.
Ali Al-Murshid
10/25/24
CBC2024-0329_PLANS_V1 11/6/24
7 1"= 1'-0" TYPICAL UNFORMED FOOTING
1 1"= 1'-0" TYPICAL REINF. LAP SPLICE AT CONCRETE
NOTES:
1. USE THIS STARTER WALL DETAIL FOR ALL MASONRY AND CONC. WALLS UNLESS FULLY FORMED.
2. FOUNDATION CONC. MAY BE PLACED DIRECTLY INTO NEAT EXCAVATIONS PROVIDED THE FOUNDATION TRENCH WALLS ARE STABLE AS DETERMINED BY THE SOIL ENGINEER. IN SUCH CASE, THE MINIMUM
FORM WORK SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS IS MANDATORY TO INSURE CLEAN EXCAVATIONS IMMEDIATELY PRIOR TO AND DURING THE PLACING OF CONCRETE.
3. CLEAN ALL PROPOSED CONCRETE CONTACT SURFACES AFTER CONCRETE HAS SET. 112" MIN. STARTER
WALL REQUIRED
FOR FOOTINGS
BELOW GRADE
FORM WORK NOT
PERMITTED BELOW
GRADE UNLESS
FULLY FORMED
FORM WORK SPECIFICATIONS
APPLICABLE
6" MIN. CONTINUOUS
CLEAN OUT
CUT BACK
SPALL TYP.
CURB OR
STARTER WALL
2x PLANKING
TYP.
WIDTH PER PLAN + 2"
STAKES NOT
PERMITTED
WITHIN
FOOTING
SECTION
24" MIN.
STAGGER
LAP SPLICE
SEE SCH.
LAP SPLICE
SEE SCH.
LEGEND:
db = BAR DIAMETER
A = CLEAR COVER
B = CLEAR SPACING OF BARS
B
db
B
SPLICE OR
LAPPING BAR
A
NOTES:
1. THE SCHEDULED LAP SPLICE LENGTHS
ARE FOR EITHER OF THE FOLLOWING
CASES:
A. CLEAR SPACING OF BARS BEING
DEVELOPED OR SPLICED NOT LESS
THAN (2db), AND CLEAR COVER NOT
LESS THAN (db).
B. CLEAR SPACING OF BARS BEING
DEVELOPED OR SPLICED SHALL NOT
BE LESS THAN (db), CLEAR COVER NOT
LESS THAN (db), AND STIRRUPS/TIES
THROUGHOUT LAP SPLICE NOT MORE
THAN 6" ON CENTER.
2. MULTIPLY LAP SPLICE LENGTHS BY 1.5 FOR
CASES NOT MEETING THE CONDITIONS AS
DESCRIBED IN NOTE 1.
3. USE CLASS "B" SPLICES FOR VERTICAL &
HORIZONTAL BARS TYPICAL U.N.O..
4. TOP BARS ARE HORIZONTAL BARS PLACED
SO THAT 12-INCHES OR MORE OF
CONCRETE IS CAST IN THE MEMBER
BELOW THE BAR.
5. VALUES SHOWN ARE FOR NORMAL WEIGHT
CONCRETE. IF LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE,
MULTIPLY LAP SPLICE LENGTHS BY 1.3.
(REFER TO NOTE 2 FOR ANY ADDITIONAL
INCREASES IN LAP SPLICE LENGTHS).
6. VALUES SHOWN ARE FOR UNCOATED
GRADE 60 REINFORCEMENT.
7. ALL LAP SPLICE LENGTHS AT EACH
LOCATION SHALL BE DEFINED BY THE
SHOP DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR IS
RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE WITH ALL
COVER & SPACING REQUIREMENTS FOR
LAP SPLICES LISTED BY THE SHOP
DRAWINGS. FIELD CORRECTIONS SHALL
BE MADE AT NO COST TO THE OWNER.
8. WHEN LAPPING A SMALLER BAR WITH A
LARGE DIAMETER BAR USE THE LAP
LENGTH FOR THE SMALL DIAMETER BAR.
CLASS OF
LAP SPLICE
TOP
BAR
f'c = 4,000 PSI
fy = 60,000 PSI
TOP
BAR
DIAGRAM AT STAGGERED SPLICES
BAR SPACING DIAGRAM
A A
STRENGTH
BAR SIZEBASIC BASIC
CLASS "A" CLASS "B"
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
#10
#11
15"
19"
24"
29"
42"
48"
54"
61"
68"
20"
25"
31"
38"
55"
62"
70"
79"
88"
20"
25"
31"
38"
55"
62"
70"
79"
88"
26"
33"
41"
50"
71"
81"
91"
103"
115"
TENSION DEVELOPMENT (Ldh) LENGTHS OF STANDARD HOOKS
LEGEND:
d = BAR DIAMETER
D = 6d FOR #3 THROUGH #8
D = 8d FOR #9 THROUGH #11
"D""D""D""D"
12d
D
135°
6d
(3" MIN.)
4d
(212" MIN.)
135° STD. HOOK
6 1
180° STD. HOOK90° STD.
HOOK
HOOK DEVELOPMENT
LENGTH "Ldh" SEE TABLE
HOOK DEVELOPMENT
LENGTH "Ldh" SEE TABLE
"G"
"J"
STANDARD HOOK NOTES:
1. ALL HOOK BARS SHALL EXTEND AS FAR AS POSSIBLE WITH A MINIMUM 2"
END COVER AND WITH EMBEDMENT NOT LESS THAN SHOWN ON THE SCHEDULE U.N.O. ON PLANS.
2. SEE GENERAL NOTES MINIMUM SIDE COVER.
BAR SIZE
0'-8"
0'-10"
1'-0"
1'-5"
1'-7"
1'-10"
2'-1"
3"
"J" 180° HOOK
#3
4" #4
5" #5
6" #6
7" #7
8" #8
#9
#10
"G" 90°
HOOK
1134"
1'-114"
"D"
214"
3"
334"
412"
514"
6"
912"
1034"1'-10"
1'-712"
1'-4"
1'-2"
12"
10"
8"
6"
1'-3"
STANDARD HOOK DEVELOPMENT LENGTH "Ldh"
NORMAL WEIGHT
4000 psi
6 1"= 1'-0" TYTPICAL EQUIP. PAD DETAIL
12 BOLT Ø
OR 6" MIN.
10"
MIN.
VARIES
NOTE 2
3"
CLR.
3"
CLR.
NOTE 2
ANCHOR BOLT OR
EXPANSION ANCHOR
WHERE OCCURS
CONC. S.O.G.,
EXTERIOR PAVING
OR FINISH GRADE
12" THK.COMPRESSIVE
MATERIAL ALL
AROUND BASE
SEE DETAIL
NOTES:
1. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWING SPECIFICATIONS.
2. CURB HEIGHT, 4" MIN. WHERE NEEDED
#4@12" O.C.EA. WAY, TOP & BOT.
W/ 90° HOOK AT EA. END TYP.
2 -
4 N.T.S DETAIL
JOINT SEALANT, SIKASIL
728SL ASTM D-5893 OR
APPROVED EQUAL (SELF
LEVELING)
5/8" BACKER ROD
CLOSED-CELL
RESILIENT FOAM
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
BETWEEN SLAB
1/2" THK. ASPHALT MATERIAL
12"
5 8"
1 12"
10 1"= 1'-0" TYPICAL BENDS AT REINF.
- - -
- - -
FINISH GRADE
RJ
SS
DS
HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC
DRAFT IMPROVEMENT PLANS - CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISMENT HERITAGE HALL HVAC 30% CD 04/02/24 --
3096 HARDING STREET, CARLSBAD, CA 92008
90% CD 05/10/24 --
1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130
IRVINE, CA. 92606
TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800
IDS
IDS GROUP
Project # 22X006.03
PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/11/24 --
18 SECTION AND DETAILS
S-501
NAS
NGI
AL
ON
SI
EL
E
RP
O
EFM.
TRE
DE
S
EER
S
IA
OR
FI
AL
L
RA
UT
N
R
GER I
TE
OF C
RTS
U
SAT
C
No. 3930
S
N
AH
AMI
DATE: 10/11/2024
16 19
17 P L A N R E V I E W A P P R O V A L
THESE PLANS/DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN
REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS
CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA AND AMENDED BY THE
JURISDICTION. PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF
DOCUMENTS DOES NOT AUTHORIZE
CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF
ANY FEDERAL, STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.
BY: _________________ DATE: ________________
True North Compliance Services, Inc.
THIS SET OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MUST BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES
AND IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE ANY CHANGES OR
ALTERATIONS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM THE
CITY. OCCUPANCY OF STRUCTURE(S) IS NOT
PERMITTED UNTIL FINAL APPROVAL IS GRANTED
BY ALL APPLICABLE DEPARTMENTS.
Ali Al-Murshid
10/25/24
CBC2024-0329_PLANS_V1 11/6/24
B-LINE 22 W/ TOLCO
FIG 981 OR 985 EA END
9 NTS MEP DUCT HANGER
12"Ø THREADED ROD
W/ ROD STIFFENER
PER
4 -
#10 SELF TAPPING SHEET
METAL SCREW MAX 12" O.C.
MAX SCREW LENGTH 1" TYP
1" MAX TYP
Fp
Wp±Fv
B-LINE B22, TYP
B-LINE B22 SOLID, PUNCHED
OR SLOTTED CHANNEL.
TOLCO FIG. 99 OR B-LINE
ATR ALL THREAD ROD.
4" MAX. DISTANCE
FROM TOP OF
HANGER TO FIRST
STIFF.
1"
MAX.
MAX. CLIP SPACING
BETWEEN FIG 98
(SEE CHART)
1 MAX.
TOLCO FIG. 98 ROD
STIFFENER.
TORQUE 8 FT. LBS.
ROD SIZE
38"18"
MAX. ROD
LENGTH
WITHOUT ROD
STIFFENER
12 "
58 "
34"
78"
25"
37"
43"
31"
MAX.
COMPRESSION
FORCE WITHOUT
STIFFENER
MAX. SPACING
BETWEEN
TOLCO FIG. 98
410
730
1690
2320
1160
13"
18"
28"
33"
23"
1246
2105
4493
6021
3187
MAX.
COMPRESSION
FORCE WITH
STIFFENER
B-LINE B22 SOLID,
PUNCHED OR
SLOTTED CHANNEL
MAX. ROD LENGTH WITHOUT STIFFENER (SEE TABLE)
5 NTS ROD STIFFENER
NOTES:
1. ROD STIFFENERS ARE REQUIRED ONLY ON VERTICAL STRUT COMPONENT OF THE SEISMIC BRACE
SYSTEM ON HANGER AND TRAPEZE ASSEMBLIES THAT HAVE SEISMIC BRACING BRACING ATTACHED AT OR WITHIN 6" OF THE ROD. A MINIMUM OF TWO ROD STIFFENERS (TOLCO FIG. 98) MUST BE INSTALLED.
2. DETAIL APPLIES TO ALL HUNG UTILITIES INCLUDING SINGLE HUNG UTILITIES, TRAPEZE HUNG UTILITIES, AND HUNG EQUIPMENT.
3. AN EXCEPTION IS THE USE OF TWO OPPOSING RIGID BRACES AT THE SAME LOCATION. FOR INDIVIDUALLY HUNG PIPE THE TWO OPPOSING RIGID BRACES MUST BE AT THE SAME HANGER ROD; TOTAL OF (2) FOR TRANSVERSE, OR TWO (2) LONGITUDINAL FOR A TRAPEZE HANGER THE TWO OPPOSING RIGID BRACES MUST BE AT SAME HANGER ROD; TOTAL OF TWO (2) FOR TRANVERSE , OR FOUR (4) FOR LONGITUDINAL. THE TWO OPPSING BRACES MUST BE AT THE SAME ANGLE FROM HORIZONTAL AND WITHIN 5 DEGREES OF 180 DEGRESS FROM EACH OTHER. IN THIS CASE NO STIFFENING OF VERTICAL ROD IS NECESSARY.
4. MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TOLCO FIG. 98, BODY: ASTM A-1011 CS TYPE B SAE; 1006 BOLT: HEX BOLT GR5
5. THREADED ROD SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A307
30°-45°
13 NTS TYPICAL BLOCKING DETAIL
3" MIN
EQ.EQ.
2" MIN2" MIN
L3x3x3/16x0'-3"(E) PLYWOOD
SHEATHING
(E) ROOF JOIST
4x6 BLOCKING W/
SIMPSON A34 EA.
SIDE EA. END
CASE A
12"Ø THRU BOLT
3" MIN
EQ.EQ.
2" MIN2" MIN
KICKER END TOLCO FIG 981
OR 985 EA. END
CASE B
2x2x1/4
PLATE WASHER
4x BLOCKING
1/2"Ø ASTM A307 BOLT OR
ASTM A36 THREADED ROD,
SNUG TIGHT TYP.
TOLCO FIG 981 OR
985 EA. END
30º-45º
FOR INFORMATION NOT
SHOWN SEE CASE A*
2" MIN2" MIN
CASE C
(E) PLYWOOD
SHEATHING
(E) ROOF JOIST
PER PLAN
4x BLOCKING
PER
TYP
13 -
NOTES:
1. STEEL ANGLE SHALL CONFORN TO ASTM A36.
2. THREADED ROD SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A307.
3. BOLTS SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A307.
DOUBLE NUT TYP.
1 NTS DUCTED DX FAN COL UNIT WITH ECONOMIZER
8 NTS MEP DUCT HANGER
B-LINE B22 W/ TOLCO FIG
981 OR 985 EA. END
12"Ø THREADED ROD
W/ ROD STIFFENER
PER
5 -
SHEET METAL STRAPS
2 12" x12 GA. (TYP)
(18"Ø MAX)
(E) PLYWOOD
SHEATHING
(E) ROOF JOIST
PER PLAN
4x BLOCKING
PER
13 -TYP
2" MIN TYP
2" MAX
(TYP)
30°-60°
(E) PLYWOOD
SHEATHING
(E) ROOF JOIST
PER PLAN
4x BLOCKING
PER
13 -TYP
ISOLATOR
HANGER PER
2 M501
12"Ø THREADED
ROD W/ ROD
STIFFENER
PER
5 -B-LINE B22 W/ TOLCO FIG
981 OR 985 EA. END
FLEXIBLE DUCT
CONNECTION
FACTORY
ECONOMIZER
MAX WT 80 LBS
13" MAX
FC-1 MAX
WT 105 LBS
FLEXIBLE DUCT
CONNECTION
36" MAX
UNIT HANGER
BRACKET
A SECTION
NOTES:
1. SECURE UNIT TO STRUCTURE USING FACTORY HANGER BRACKET PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
2. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDLINES. ALLOW ACCESS TO FILTERS AND CONTROLS.
TOP VIEW
B-LINE B22 W/ TOLCO FIG
981 OR 985 EA. END
B-LINE B22 W/ TOLCO FIG
981 OR 985 EA. END OR
FACTORY
ECONOMIZER
ISOLATOR
HANGER PER
2 M501
12"Ø THREADED ROD W/
ROD STIFFENER
PER
5 -
(E) ROOFN JOIST OR 4x
BLOCKING PER
13 -TYP
(E) PLYWOOD
SHEATHING
13 -
13 - 26" MAX.32" MAX.
FACTORY
ECONOMIZER
56" MAX.
B SECTION
B-LINE B22 LONGITUDINAL
BRACING EA. SIDE TYP.
B
-
A
-
10 NTS MEP DUCT HANGER
(E) 2x EXTERIOR
BEARING WALL
(E) PLYWOOD
SHEATING
#10 SMS @
12"O.C. T & B
B-LINE 22 TYP
(2) 38"Ø THRU BOLT
B10SH ANGLE TYP
3" CLR. (2) 14"Ø x 3" TO (E)
2x STUD
4x BLOCKING
PER
13 -
B-LINE B22 IN
PLAN BRACE
SIMILAR TO
1 -
12"Ø THREADED
ROD W/ ROD
STIFFENER
PER
5 -
(E) PLYWOOD
SHEATHING
B-LINE HN SERIES
HEX NUT END B-LINE
B200 SERIES SQUARE
WASHER
11 NTS MEP DUCT HANGER
(E) 2x EXTERIOR
BEARING WALL
4x BLOCKING
PER
13 -
B-LINE B22 IN
PLAN BRACE
SIMILAR TO
1 -
12"Ø THREADED
ROD W/ ROD
STIFFENER
PER
5 -
(E) PLYWOOD
SHEATHING
MEP DUCT
ABOVE PER
10 -
10 -
16 NTS ROOF BEAM TO (E) GLB TRUSS
(E) ROOF
SHEATHING
(E) E.N.
(E) WALL
SHEATHING
(E) GLB TRUSS
(E) 2x EXTERIOR
BEARING WALL
6x ROOF BEAM PER
PLAN W/ SIMPSON "LUS"
HANGER EA. END
(E) E.N.
4x BLOCKING WHERE
OCCUR PER PLAN &
DETAIL
13 -
(E) GLB TRUSS
FC
1 FC
1 RJ
SS
DS
HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC
DRAFT IMPROVEMENT PLANS - CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISMENT HERITAGE HALL HVAC 30% CD 04/02/24 --
3096 HARDING STREET, CARLSBAD, CA 92008
90% CD 05/10/24 --
1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130
IRVINE, CA. 92606
TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800
IDS
IDS GROUP
Project # 22X006.03
PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/11/24 --
18 SECTION AND DETAILS
S-502
NAS
NGI
AL
ON
SI
EL
E
RP
O
EFM.
TRE
DE
S
EER
S
IA
OR
FI
AL
L
RA
UT
N
R
GER I
TE
OF C
RTS
U
SAT
C
No. 3930
S
N
AH
AMI
DATE: 10/11/2024
17 19
18 P L A N R E V I E W A P P R O V A L
THESE PLANS/DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN
REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS
CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA AND AMENDED BY THE
JURISDICTION. PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF
DOCUMENTS DOES NOT AUTHORIZE
CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF
ANY FEDERAL, STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.
BY: _________________ DATE: ________________
True North Compliance Services, Inc.
THIS SET OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MUST BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES
AND IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE ANY CHANGES OR
ALTERATIONS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM THE
CITY. OCCUPANCY OF STRUCTURE(S) IS NOT
PERMITTED UNTIL FINAL APPROVAL IS GRANTED
BY ALL APPLICABLE DEPARTMENTS.
Ali Al-Murshid
10/25/24
CBC2024-0329_PLANS_V1 11/6/24
1 NTS OPENING DETAIL
(E) 12" PLYWOOD
SHEATHING(E) 6x ROOF BEAM
PER PLAN
(E) 2x6 @ 24"
STUD TYP F.V.
4x6 HEADER W/
SIMPSON A34 EA. SIDE
EA. END TYP
4x6 JAMB STUD EA. SIDE
W/ SIMPSON A34 EA. SIDE
EA. END TYP
PORTION OF (E) 2x TO BE
REMOVED
4x6 SILL W/ SIMPSON
A34 EA. SIDE EA. END
(2) 10d x 3" NAIL @ 16"
O.C. STAGGER
48" MAX
48" MAX
(E) 6x HEADER
F.V.
(E) CLIP @ 24" O.C.
STAGGERED EA. SIDE
W/ 2" VERT. SLOT F.V.
SIMPSON A34 TYP.
SIMPSON A34 TYP.
NOTE:
- CONTRACT SHALL PROVIDE TEMPORARY
SHORING BEFORE CUTTING OPENING
RJ
SS
DS
HARDING CENTER REFURB. HERITAGE HALL HVAC
DRAFT IMPROVEMENT PLANS - CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISMENT HERITAGE HALL HVAC 30% CD 04/02/24 --
3096 HARDING STREET, CARLSBAD, CA 92008
90% CD 05/10/24 --
1 PETERS CANYON ROAD, SUITE 130
IRVINE, CA. 92606
TEL: 949-387-8500, FAX: 949-387-0800
IDS
IDS GROUP
Project # 22X006.03
PLAN CHECK SUBMITTAL10/11/24 --
18 SECTION AND DETAILS
S-503
NAS
NGI
AL
ON
SI
EL
E
RP
O
EFM.
TRE
DE
S
EER
S
IA
OR
FI
AL
L
RA
UT
N
R
GER I
TE
OF C
RTS
U
SAT
C
No. 3930
S
N
AH
AMI
DATE: 10/11/2024
18 19
19 P L A N R E V I E W A P P R O V A L
THESE PLANS/DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN
REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE CALIFORNIA BUILDING STANDARDS
CODES AS ADOPTED BY THE STATE OF
CALIFORNIA AND AMENDED BY THE
JURISDICTION. PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF
DOCUMENTS DOES NOT AUTHORIZE
CONSTRUCTION TO PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF
ANY FEDERAL, STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.
BY: _________________ DATE: ________________
True North Compliance Services, Inc.
THIS SET OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
MUST BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES
AND IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE ANY CHANGES OR
ALTERATIONS WITHOUT PERMISSION FROM THE
CITY. OCCUPANCY OF STRUCTURE(S) IS NOT
PERMITTED UNTIL FINAL APPROVAL IS GRANTED
BY ALL APPLICABLE DEPARTMENTS.
Ali Al-Murshid
10/25/24
CBC2024-0329_PLANS_V1 11/6/24
PROJECT MANUAL
BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
HARDING CENTER REFURBISHMENT
HERITAGE HALL HVAC.
IDS Project #: 22X006.03
DATE: May 15, 2024
SIGNATURE AND STAMPS
Carlsbad Harding Center
CITY OF CARLSBAD - HARDING CENTER REFURBISHMENT - HERITAGE HALL HVAC
SIGNATURES AND STAMPS
Specifications for Project, City of Carlsbad - Harding Center Refurbishment – Heritage Hall HVAC have been prepared under the direction of the following architects/engineers:
As to the general specifications and requirements:
As to Architectural portions:
05/15/2024
Signature and Date
As to Structural portions:
05/15/2024
Signature and Date
SIGNATURE AND STAMPS
Carlsbad Harding Center
As to Electrical engineering portions:
05/15/2024
Signature and Date
As to Mechanical engineering portions:
05/15/2024
Signature and Date
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES
03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03 30 00 CAST- IN - PLACE CONCRETE
DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 13 26 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION
23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
23 31 13 METAL DUCTS
23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 46 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
23 37 23 HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS
23 81 26 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES
26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 41 19 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 02 41 19
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.
B. Pre-demolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.
C. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 41 19 - 2
Carlsbad Harding Center
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Contractor as part of change order work before start of the work.
2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Contractor as part of the change order work before start of the work
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 41 19 - 3
Carlsbad Harding Center
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.
C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
D. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.
1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.
2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.
c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.
e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 41 19 - 4
Carlsbad Harding Center
g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain[ fire watch and] portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.[ Comply with requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."] B. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area indicated on Drawings.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 41 19 - 5
Carlsbad Harding Center
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION 02 4119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 41 19 - 6
Carlsbad Harding Center
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES
03 10 00 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 03 10 00
CONCRETE FORMS AND ACESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section.
B. Section Includes:
1. Formwork for cast-in-place concrete as indicated.
2. Installation of items to be embedded in concrete, such as anchor bolts, inserts, embeds, and sleeves.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 03 2000: Concrete Reinforcement
2. Section 03 3000: Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Regulatory Requirements: Except as otherwise specified herein, Work of this section shall be in accordance with CBC, Chapter 19, Concrete.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating locations of forms, joints, embedded items, and accessories.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's Product Data for form materials and accessories.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement:
1. Conform to ACI 347R-14 (or latest edition).
2. Plywood: Conform to tables for form design and strength in APA Form V 345.
B. Mock-ups: Provide mock-ups for architectural exposed finishes; 100 square feet minimum size.
Locate as required by the Architect.
CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES
03 10 00 - 2
Carlsbad Harding Center
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Form materials may be reused during progress of the Work provided they are completely cleaned and reconditioned, recoated for each use, capable of producing formwork of required quality, and are structurally sound.
B. Form Lumber: WCLIB Construction Grade or Better, WWPA No. 1 or Better.
C. Plywood: PS 1-19, Group I, Exterior Grade B-B Plyform or better, minimum 5-ply and 3/4 inch thick for exposed locations and at least 5/8 inch thick for unexposed locations, grade marked, not mill oiled. Furnished plywood with medium or high density overlay is permitted.
D. Coated Form Plywood: For exposed painted concrete, plastic overlaid plywood of grade specified above, factory coated with a form coating and release agent Noxcrete", or equal.
E. Tube Forms: Burke "SmoothTube,” Sonoco "Seamless Sonotubes,” or Alton Building Products "Sleek Seamless Standard Wall,” of the type leaving no marks in concrete, one-piece lengths for required heights.
F. Joist Forms: Code recognized steel or molded plastic types as required.
G. Special Forms: For exposed integrally colored concrete, plywood as above with high density overlay, plywood with integral structural hardboard facing or fibrous glass reinforced plastic facing, providing specified finish.
H. For Exposed Concrete Finish:
1. Plywood: New, waterproof, synthetic resin bonded, exterior type Douglas fir or Southern pine plywood manufactured especially for concrete formwork and conforming to NIST PS 1, BB grade, class I.
2. Glass-Fiber-Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to structural tolerances and appearance of finished concrete surfaces.
3. Steel: Minimum 16 gage sheet, well matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete, without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearances of finished concrete surfaces.
4. Plywood: "Finland Form,” or "Combi Form" distributed by North American Plywood Corporation. The material shall be furnished with hard smooth birch face veneers with phenolic resin thermally fused onto panel sides. Edges shall be factory sealed.
I. Form Ties: Prefabricated rod, flat band, wire, internally threaded disconnecting type, not leaving metal within 1-1/2 inch of concrete surface.
J. Form Coating: Non-staining clear coating free from oil, silicone, wax, not grain-raising, "Formshield" by A.C. Horn, Inc., "Release" by Burke Concrete Accessories, or "Cast-Off" by Sonneborn Building Products. Where form liners are furnished, provide form coatings recommended by form liner manufacturer.
K. Form Liner: Rigid or resilient type by L.M. Scofield, Labrado Forms, Symons, or Greenstreak.
L. Void Forms: Manufactured by SureVoid Products, Inc, or equal. Forms shall be "WallVoid" for temporary support of concrete walls and grade beams spanning between supports, and "SlabVoid" for creating gaps between concrete slabs or steps and underlying soils. Void forms
CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES
03 10 00 - 3
Carlsbad Harding Center
shall be fabricated of corrugated paper with moisture resistant exterior, and shall be capable of withstanding working load of 1,500 psf. Provide accessories as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Forms shall be constructed to shape final concrete structure conforming to shape, lines and dimensions of members required by Drawings and Specifications and shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. They shall be properly braced or tied together to maintain position and shape. Forms and their supports shall be designed so that previously placed structures will not be damaged. Forms shall be true to line within the tolerances set forth in ACI 347 and ACI 117, whichever is stricter, unless otherwise directed by the Architect.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Plywood shall be installed with horizontal joints level, vertical joints plumb and with joints tight.
Back joints by studs or solid blocking and fill where necessary for smoothness. Reused plywood shall be thoroughly cleaned, damaged edges or surfaces repaired and both sides and edges oiled with colorless form oil. Nail plywood along edges, and to intermediate supports, with common wire nails spaced as necessary to maintain alignment and prevent warping.
B. Openings for Cleaning: Provide temporary openings at points in formwork to facilitate cleaning and inspection. At base of walls and wide piers, bottom form board on one face for entire length shall be omitted until form has been cleaned and inspected.
3.3 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Forms shall not be removed until concrete has sufficiently hydrated to maintain its integrity and not be damaged by form removal operations. The contractor shall remain fully and solely responsible for structure condition and integrity in relation to decisions regarding time of form removal. The preferred method of determining form removal time is the assessment of sufficient concrete strength based on tests of field cured specimens per 3.03B; however, at the contractor’s option and sole responsibility, the contractor may refer to Section 5.7 of ACI 347R- 14 for minimum elapsed times and associated footnotes and provisions. Shoring shall not be removed until member has acquired sufficient strength to support its weight, load upon it, and added load of construction.
B. Compressive strength of in-place concrete shall be determined by testing field-cured specimens’ representative of concrete location or members, as specified in Section 03 3000:
Cast-In-Place Concrete.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
3.5 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES
03 10 00 - 4
Carlsbad Harding Center
END OF SECTION 031000
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03 20 00 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 03 20 00
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section.
B. Section Includes:
1. Concrete steel reinforcement as indicated.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 031000: Concrete Forms and Accessories
2. Section 033000: Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Regulatory Requirements: Fabrication and placement of reinforcing shall be in accordance with requirements of CBC, Chapter 19.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit steel reinforcement Shop Drawings in accordance with ACI 315.
Include assembly diagrams, bending charts and slab plans. Indicate lengths and location of splices, size and lengths of reinforcing steel. All reinforcement shop drawings shall be submitted in electronic format (PDF).
B. Closeout Submittals: Record exact locations of reinforcing that vary from Shop Drawings.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement:
1. CBC, Chapter 19, Concrete.
2. American Concrete Institute (ACI).
3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Manual of Standard Practice.
4. American Welding Society (AWS).
B. Source Quality Control: Refer to Division 01 Sections for general requirements and to following paragraphs for specific procedures. Testing laboratory retained by the Owner shall perform following conformance testing, select test Samples of bars, ties, and stirrups from the material at the Project site or from the place of distribution, with each Sample consisting of not less than two 18-inch long pieces, and perform the following tests according to ASTM A615.
1. Identified Bars: If Samples are obtained from bundles as delivered from the mill, identified as to heat number, accompanied by mill analyses and mill test reports, and properly tagged with the identification certificate to be readily identified, perform one tensile and one bend test for each 10 tons or fraction thereof of each size of bars. Submit mill reports when Samples are selected.
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03 20 00 - 2
Carlsbad Harding Center
2. Unidentified Bars: When positive identification of reinforcing bars cannot be performed and when random Samples are obtained, perform tests for each 2.5 tons or fraction thereof, one tensile and one bend test from each size of bars.
C. Certification of Welders: Shop and Project site welding shall be performed by certified welding operators.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Avoid exposure to dirt, moisture, or conditions harmful to reinforcing.
B. Reinforcing steel bars, wire, and wire fabric shall be stored on the Project site to permit easy access for examination and identification of each shipment. Material of each shipment shall be separated for size and shape.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide reinforcing of sizes, gages and lengths indicated, bent to indicated shapes.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, or ASTM A706 deformed grade 60 billet steel unless otherwise specified or indicated.
B. Deformed Bar Anchors: ASTM A1064.
C. Bars or Rod Mats: ASTM A184.
D. Wire Fabric for Reinforcement: ASTM A1064.
E. Tie Wire: ASTM A1064, fully annealed, copper-bearing steel wire, 16 gage minimum.
F. Chairs, Spacers, Supports, and Other Accessories: Standard manufacture conforming to ACI- 315 fabricated from steel wire of required types and sizes. For reinforcement supported from grade, provide properly sized dense precast blocks of concrete.
2.3 FABRICATION OF REINFORCING BARS:
A. Comply with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice for Reinforced Concrete Construction for fabrication of reinforcing steel.
B. Bending and Forming: Fabricate bars of the indicated sizes and bend and form to required shapes and lengths by methods not injurious to materials. Do not heat reinforcement for bending. Bend bars No. 6 size and larger in the shop only. Bars with unscheduled kinks or bends are not permitted. Provide only tested and permitted bar materials.
C. Welding: Provide only ASTM A706 steel where welding is indicated. Perform welding by the direct electric arc process in accordance with AWS D1.4 and specified low-hydrogen electrodes.
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03 20 00 - 3
Carlsbad Harding Center
Preheat 6 inches each side of joint. Protect joints from drafts during the cooling process; accelerated cooling is not permitted. Do not tack weld bars. Clean metal surfaces to be welded of loose scale and foreign material. Clean welds each time electrode is changed, and chip burned edges before placing welds. When wire brushed, the completed welds must exhibit uniform section, smooth welded metal, feather edges without undercuts or overlays, freedom from porosity and clinkers, and good fusion and penetration into the base metal. Cut out welds or parts of welds deemed defective, using chisel, and replace with proper welding.
Prequalification of welds shall be in accordance with CBC requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Bars shall be bent cold. Bars partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent except as indicated on reviewed Shop Drawings. Before installation, clean reinforcing of loose scale, rust, oil, dirt and any coating that could reduce bond.
B. Accurately position, install, and secure reinforcing to prevent displacement during the placement of concrete.
C. Provide metal chairs to hold reinforcement the required distance above form bottoms. In beams and slab construction, provide chairs under top slab reinforcement as well as under bottom reinforcement. Space chairs so that reinforcement will not be displaced during installation.
Provide metal spacers to secure proper spacing. Stirrups shall be accurately and securely wired to bars at both top and bottom. At slabs, footings, and beams in contact with earth, provide concrete blocks to support reinforcement at required distance above grade.
D. Install and secure reinforcement to maintain required clearance between parallel bars and between bars and forms. Lapped splices shall be installed wherever possible in a manner to provide required clearance between sets of bars. Stagger lapped splices. Dowels and bars extending through construction joints shall be secured in position against displacement before concrete is installed and subsequently cleaned of concrete encrustations while they are still soft.
E. Do not install reinforcing in supported slabs and beams until walls and columns have been installed to underside of slabs and beams or until construction joints have been thoroughly cleaned. Reinforcing shall be inspected before placement of concrete and cleaned as required.
F. Use deformed bars unless otherwise indicated, except for spiral reinforcement.
3.2 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 032000
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03 20 00 - 4
Carlsbad Harding Center
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section.
B. Section Includes:
1. Cast-in-place concrete placement and finishing.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 03 1000: Concrete Forms and Accessories
2. Section 03 2000: Concrete Reinforcement
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating locations of cast-in-place concrete Work and accessory items such as vapor barriers. Include details and locations of reinforcing, embedded items, and interfacing with other Work. All shop drawing submittals shall be in electronic format (PDF).
B. Product Data:
1. Mix Design: Submit a concrete mix design for each mix that will be provided for the Work.
Include water/cement ratio, size of coarse aggregate and amount of any admixture.
Predict minimum compressive strength in accordance with the strength requirements shown in the drawings and/or specifications, maximum slump, and air content percentage. Mix design submittal shall be in electronic format (PDF).
2. Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete shall deliver to the project inspector a certificate with each mixer truck. Certificate shall bear the signature of representative of the testing laboratory, and shall state quantity of cement, water, fine and coarse aggregate, and admixtures.
C. Material Samples: Submit Samples illustrating concrete finishes, minimum 12 inches x 12 inches in size.
D. Certificates: Submit a notarized certificate that each of following conforms to the latest standards indicated:
1. Aggregates – ASTM Standard C33
2. Admixtures - ASTM Standard C260
3. Curing materials - ASTM Standard C171
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 2
Carlsbad Harding Center
B. California Building Code (CBC), applicable edition as determined by the governing regulatory authority.
C. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Publications, latest editions or as applicable as determined by the governing regulatory authority:
1. ACI 211 - Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions of Concrete.
2. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.
3. ACI 305 - Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting.
4. ACI 306 - Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting.
5. ACI 308 - Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete.
6. ACI 309 - Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete.
7. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards, latest editions:
1. ASTM A 185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric For Concrete Reinforcement.
2. ASTM C 31 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.
3. ASTM C 33 - Concrete Aggregates.
4. ASTM C 39 - Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
5. ASTM C 88 - Soundness of Aggregates by use of Sulphate or Magnesium Sulphate.
6. ASTM C 94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.
7. ASTM C 143 - Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
8. ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement.
9. ASTM C 171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
10. ASTM C 172 - Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
11. ASTM C 173 - Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method.
12. ASTM C 227 - Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method).
13. ASTM C 231 - Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method.
14. ASTM C 260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
15. ASTM C 289 - Potential Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method).
16. ASTM D 1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).
E. Continuous inspection shall be provided at the batch plant and for transit-mixed concrete to run check sieve analysis of aggregate, check moisture content of fine aggregate, check design of mix, check cement being used with test reports, check loading of mixer trucks, and certify to quantities of materials placed in each mixer truck.
F. Inspection shall be performed by a representative of a testing laboratory selected by the Owner.
Owner will pay for inspection costs. Notify the laboratory 24 hours in advance of time concrete is to be mixed. Notify the laboratory of postponement or cancellation of mixing within at least 24 hours of scheduling time.
G. Continuous batch plant inspection requirement may be waived in accordance with the CBC.
Waiver shall be in writing.
H. Strength Test of Concrete: Refer to Test and Inspection Requirements.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Mixing and Placing Concrete: Refer to Test and Inspection Requirements.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 3
Carlsbad Harding Center
B. Ready-mix concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with ASTM C94, CBC and CBC Standards, as well as ACI 318. Each batch of concrete delivered to the project site shall be accompanied by a time slip bearing departure time and signature of batch plant supervisor.
Concrete placement shall be completed, and concrete placed into its final position as shown on the drawings within 90 minutes after start of mixing. Start of mixing time and completion of concrete placement time shall be documented in writing for all concrete pours.
C. Store cement and aggregate materials so as to prevent their deterioration or intrusion by foreign matter. Deteriorated or contaminated materials shall not be furnished.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Cold Weather Requirements:
1. Adequate equipment shall be provided for heating concrete materials and protecting concrete during freezing or near-freezing weather. Surfaces, in which concrete is to come in contact with, shall be free from frost or ice. No frozen materials or materials containing ice shall be furnished.
2. When placing concrete during freezing or near-freezing weather the mix shall have a temperature of at least 50 degrees F., but not more than 90 degrees F. when cement is added. Concrete shall be maintained at a temperature of at least 50 degrees F. for at least 72 hours after placing or until it has thoroughly hydrated. When necessary, concrete materials shall be heated before mixing. Special precautions shall be provided for protection of transit-mixed concrete.
B. Hot Weather Requirements:
1. During hot weather, proper attention shall be provided for ingredients, production methods, handling, placing, protection and curing, to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water evaporation which could impair required strength or durability.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Mix and deliver in accordance with requirements of CBC.
B. Strength of Concrete: Concrete, unless otherwise indicated or specified, shall be provided with a minimum ultimate 28-day strength of 4,500 psi (f'c). For high-early-strength concrete, age for reaching the f'c shall be as indicated on Drawings.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C 150. Furnished cement shall be as selected and reviewed for concrete proportioning.
B. Aggregates: Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C 33 and C 227 except as modified herein.
Any suitable individual grading of coarse aggregate may be furnished, provided such grading results in a mix that conforms to all requirements of this specification and the drawings. The gradings shown below are typical industry values for maximum aggregate sizes from ¾” to 1- 1/2”. Since this project limits maximum aggregate size to 1”, the 1-1/2” gradation information does not apply. If a smaller maximum aggregate size is used, for example 3/8”, the contractor shall submit an appropriate gradation.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 4
Carlsbad Harding Center
GRADING OF COMBINED AGGREGATE
Sieve Number or 1-1/2" 1" 3/4"
Size in Inches Maximum Maximum Maximum
Passing a 2" ------ ------ ------
Passing a 1-1/2" 95-100 ------ ------
Passing a 1" 70-90 90-100 ------
Passing a 3/4" 50-80 70-95 90-100
Passing a 3/8" 40-60 45-70 55-75
Passing a No. 4 35-55 35-55 40-60
Passing a No. 8 25-40 27-45 30-46
Passing a No. 16 16-34 20-38 23-40
Passing a No. 30 12-25 12-27 13-28
Passing a No. 50 2-12 5-15 5-15
Passing a No. 100 0-3 0-5 0-5
C. Water: Water shall be potable and free from deleterious matter.
D. Admixtures: ACI 318, Section 3.6.
E. Expansion Joint Fillers: Preformed strips, non-extruding and resilient bituminous type, of thickness indicated, conforming to ASTM D1751.
F. Curing Paper and Liquid Curing Compounds:
1. Curing Paper: A standard brand conforming to ASTM C171, Type 1 - Regular.
2. Liquid Curing Compounds: A standard brand, clear liquid conforming to ASTM C309, Master Builders, Grace, Antihydro.
G. Abrasive Aggregate: Norton Alundum, Union Carbide Carborundum, or equal, graded #12 through #30 sizes, color as selected by Architect.
H. Underlayment: Latex underlayment for filling low spots in concrete shall be Tile-Tex by Flintkote Co., Webtex #60 or Fixallatex by Dowman Products Co.
I. Stair Strips and Nosing:
1. Fabricated from 6063-T5 extruded aluminum, mill finish. Anti-slip filler shall contain at least 60 percent virgin grain aluminum oxide abrasive. Binder shall be fully cured resilient type epoxy, with binder-to-filler ratio of 13 percent. The epoxy-abrasive filler shall extend over the curved front edge of the nosing and shall be securely bonded to the extruded aluminum base.
2. Manufactured by Wooster Products Inc. American Safety Tread Co. Inc., or equal.
3. Nosing and strips for concrete casting shall be provided with Sure-Hold anchors, chevron shaped continuous full length of nosing or strip.
4. Nosings and anchors for attachment to hydrated concrete stairs and wood stairs shall be similar to those specified below, except they shall be provided with countersunk holes for screws and fasteners.
5. Colors: As selected by Architect to contrast with stair color. Colors shall extend uniformly through the filler.
6. Strip and Nosing Types:
a. Nosings for sloped riser steel pan stairs: Type WP4J, 4-1/16 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick.
b. Nosings for new concrete stairs: Type WP4C, 4-1/16 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick, nose projects down 1/4 inch.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 5
Carlsbad Harding Center
c. Nosings for square edged steel pan stairs: Type WP4SP, 4-1/16 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick nose.
d. Strips for recessing into concrete stairs: Type WP1A, except 2-1/4 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick. American Safety Tread Co., Type 24, or equal. e. Strips for adhering to existing or hydrated concrete: Flex-Tred anti-safety strips, minimum 2-1/4 inches wide. Cut from rolls and round corners. f. Strips for anchoring into wood or stone: American Safety Tread Co., Type 24H, or equal, with holes for fasteners, 2-1/4 inches wide.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Time of Placing: Do not place concrete until reinforcement, conduits, outlet boxes, anchors, hangers, sleeves, bolts, and other embedded materials are securely fastened in place. Contact the inspector at least 24 hours before placing concrete; do not place concrete until inspected and approved.
B. Pouring Record: A record shall be kept on the Project site of time and date of placing concrete in each portion of structure. Such record shall be maintained on the roject site until substantial completion and shall be available for examination by all project team members, including the design team, inspectors, and Owner.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Moisture Barrier: Before installation of screeds and slab reinforcement, install a moisture barrier under slabs on grade. Place membrane in as large sheets as possible, lapped 12 inches at sides and ends, with top lap placed in the direction of the spreading of concrete. Extend membrane and lap at least 4 inches onto adjoining wall surfaces and seal with pressure- sensitive tape.
1. Install moisture barrier on minimum 2-inch bed of sand, unless otherwise indicated, over gravel base as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Patch punctures and tears in moisture barrier.
B. Reglets and Rebates:
1. Form reglets and rebates in concrete to receive flashing, frames and other equipment as detailed and required. Coordinate dimensions and locations required with other related Work.
2. If concrete slabs on grade adjoin a wall or other perpendicular concrete surface, form a reglet in wall to receive and carry horizontal concrete Work. Reglet shall be full thickness of the slab and shall be 3/4 inch wide, unless otherwise indicated. Requirement does not apply to exterior walks, unless specifically indicated.
C. Screeds: Install screeds accurately and maintain at required grade or slab elevations after steel reinforcement has been installed, but before starting to place concrete. Install screeds adjacent to walls and in parallel rows not to exceed 8 feet on centers.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Conveying and Placing:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 6
Carlsbad Harding Center
1. Concrete shall be placed only under direct observation of the project inspector. Do not place concrete outside of regular working hours unless the project inspector has been notified at least 48 hours in advance.
2. Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to location of final placement by methods which will prevent separation or loss of materials.
3. Concrete shall be placed as nearly as practicable to its final position to avoid segregation due to re-handling or flowing. No concrete that has partially hydrated or has been contaminated by foreign materials shall be placed, nor shall re-tempered concrete or concrete which has been remixed after initial set be placed.
4. In placing concrete in columns, walls or thin sections, provide openings in forms, elephant trunks, tremies or other recognized devices, to prevent segregation and accumulation of partially hydrated concrete on forms or metal reinforcement above level of concrete being placed. Such devices shall be installed so that concrete will be dropped vertically. Unconfined vertical drop of concrete from end of such devices to final placement surface shall not exceed 6 feet.
5. Concrete shall be placed as a continuous operation until placing of panel or section is completed. Top surfaces of vertically formed lifts shall be level unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
6. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated during placement and shall be worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures with mechanical vibrators.
7. Where conditions make consolidation difficult, or where reinforcement is congested, batches of mortar containing same proportions of cement, sand, and water as provided in the concrete, shall first be deposited in the forms to a depth of at least one inch.
B. Compaction and Screeding:
1. Tamp freshly placed concrete with a heavy tamper until at least 3/8 inch of mortar is brought to surface. Concrete shall then be tamped with a light tamper and screeded with a heavy straightedge until depressions and irregularities are eliminated, and surface is true to finish grades or elevations. Remove excess water and debris.
2. Where slabs are to receive separate cement finish or mortar setting bed, continued tamping to raise mortar to surface is not performed. Laitance shall be removed by brushing with a stiff brush or by light sandblasting to expose clean top surface of coarse aggregate.
C. Floating and Troweling:
1. When concrete has hydrated sufficiently, it shall be floated to a compact and smooth surface. After floating, wait until concrete has reached proper consistency before troweling. Top surfaces shall receive at least 2 troweling operations with steel hand trowel. Prior to and during final troweling, apply a fine mist of water frequently with an atomizing type of fog sprayer. Omit troweling for slabs to receive a separate cement finish.
2. For interior finish slabs, final troweling shall provide a hard, impervious, and non-slip surfaces, free from defects and blemishes. Finished surface shall be within a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Avoid burnishing. Do not add cement or sand to absorb excess moisture.
3. Exterior Paving and Cement Walks: Finish as specified above, except surface shall be given a non-slip broom finish to match Sample reviewed by the Architect.
4. Vertical concrete surfaces shall be finished smooth and free from marks or other surface defects.
D. Curing:
1. Concrete shall be maintained above 50 degrees F., and in a moist condition for 7 days after placing, except that high early strength concrete shall be maintained in a moist condition for 3 days.
2. Before applying curing paper, interior floor treated with colored hardener shall be given a heavy protective coat of colored wax left unpolished, and then immediately covered with
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 7
Carlsbad Harding Center
paper. If wax is not applied within two hours after final troweling, concrete shall be sprayed with a fine water mist and maintained continuously moist until wax is applied, unless spraying is not recommended by hardener manufacturer. After other Work such as plastering and painting has been completed, curing paper shall be removed and waxed floors cleaned of protective wax coating.
3. Forms containing concrete, top of concrete between forms, and exposed concrete surfaces after removal of forms shall be maintained in a thoroughly wet condition for at least 7 consecutive days after placing.
4. If weather is hot or surface has dried out, spray surface of concrete slabs and paving with fine mist of water, starting not later than 2 hours after final troweling and continuing until sunset. Surface of finish shall be kept continuously wet until curing medium has been installed.
5. Immediately after finishing monolithic floor finish to receive resilient floor covering shall be uniformly and completely coated with liquid curing compound. a. Install compound in a manner and quantity sufficient to produce a uniform continuous thin film of water-impervious membrane. Compound shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
b. Protect adjoining surfaces from damage during installation. If curing compound is not applied immediately, cover finished concrete with wet burlap or curing paper and keep concrete surface wet for a period not to exceed thirty hours following finishing of concrete. At end of that time, burlap or paper shall be removed and curing compound installed as specified above.
6. Immediately after finishing, monolithic floor slabs not scheduled to receive resilient floor covering shall be covered with curing paper. Paper shall be lapped 3 inches at joints and sealed with waterproof sealer. Edges shall be cemented to finish. Repair or replace paper damaged during construction operations.
7. Within 24 hours after finishing, exterior slabs and paving, and interior slabs to receive cement topping or mortar setting beds, shall be covered with sand to a depth of 2 inches and kept thoroughly wet for 7 days.
a. Instead of sand covering, exterior walks and paving where no other surface treatment is specified, may be cured with clear liquid curing compound immediately installed in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
E. Filling, Leveling and Patching:
1. Concrete slabs exhibiting high or low spots and indicated to receive resilient floor covering or soft floor covering, shall have surfaces repaired. High spots shall be honed, or ground with power-driven machines to required tolerances. Low spots shall be filled with latex underlayment, installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.
2. Holes resulting from form ties or sleeve nuts shall be solidly packed, through exterior walls, by pressure grouting with cement grout, as specified. Grouted holes on exposed surfaces shall be screeded flush and finished to match adjoining surfaces.
F. Cement Base: Cement base shall be of the height, thickness, and shape detailed. Base shall be reinforced with one inch mesh, 18 gage, zinc-coated wire fabric. Base finish mixture shall be one part Portland cement, 2 parts of fine aggregate and one part pea gravel. Colored cement base shall include a chemically inert mineral oxide pigment in the mix.
3.4 FINISHING
A. Soda and Acid Wash: Concrete surfaces to receive plaster, paint, or other finish, and which have been formed by oil coated forms, shall be scrubbed with a solution of 1-1/2 pounds of caustic soda to one gallon of water. Surfaces where smooth wood or waste molds have been furnished shall be scrubbed with a solution of 20 percent muriatic acid. Wash with clean water after scrubbing.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 8
Carlsbad Harding Center
B. Sacking: Exposed concrete curbs, walls, and other surfaces shall be sacked by an application of Portland cement grout, floated, and rubbed. Sacking shall not be performed until patching and filling of holes has been completed. Entire sacking operation for any continuous area shall be started and completed within the same day.
1. Mix one part Portland cement and 1-1/2 parts fine sand with sufficient water to produce a grout having consistency of thick paint. Wet surface of concrete sufficiently to prevent absorption of water from grout. Apply grout uniformly with a brush or spray gun, then immediately float surface with a cork or other suitable float, scouring wall vigorously.
2. While grout is still plastic, finish surface with a sponge-rubber float, removing excess grout. Allow surface to dry thoroughly, then rub vigorously with dry burlap to completely remove dried grout. No visible film or grout shall remain after rubbing with burlap.
C. Sandblasting: Exterior concrete surfaces to receive stucco dash coat finish, where plywood or other smooth forms have been furnished, shall be uniformly sand blasted with sharp quartz sand under sufficient air pressure to remove dirt, form oil and other foreign materials, and roughen surface to provide a proper bond. Such surfaces shall be thoroughly washed with clean water after sandblasting.
D. Abrasive: Concrete stair treads, landings, ramps, and steps on interior and exterior of buildings, and interior exposed concrete floors in shop buildings shall receive an abrasive finish. Abrasive grains in amount of 30 pounds per 100 square feet shall be evenly installed by dust-on method and embedded into surface during first troweling operation. Additional abrasive grains, in amount of 30 pounds per 100 square feet, shall then be evenly installed and embedded into surface during final troweling operation.
E. Floor Hardener: Exposed interior concrete floors throughout shall be treated with floor hardener, as specified. Install hardener after surface of concrete has reached the point where no excess moisture is present, but while it is still plastic. Hardener shall be installed as follows:
1. Colored Hardener: Install at rate of 40 pounds per 100 square feet of surface for initial application.
2. Gray (natural) Hardener: Install at rate of 20 pounds per 100 square feet of surface for initial application.
3. Hardener shall be evenly distributed and thoroughly floated into surface mortar with a wood float. An additional 20 pounds of hardener, colored or gray, specified as above, shall be installed over each 100 square feet, and troweled to an even surface having uniform color and texture.
F. Cement Grout and Dry-Pack Concrete: Cement grout shall be mixed at the Project site and shall be composed of one volume of Portland cement and 2-1/2 volumes of fine aggregate.
Materials shall be mixed dry with sufficient water added to make mixture flow under its own weight. When grout is used as a dry pack concrete, add sufficient water to provide a stiff mixture, which can be molded into a sphere.
G. Broom Finish: Exterior stair treads and landings shall be provided with a non-slip broom finish in addition to abrasive finish specified.
H. Abrasive Stair Nosing: Nosing shall be installed according to manufacturers written recommendations.
3.5 EXPANSION AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. Construction Joints: Details and proposed location of construction joints shall be as indicated on the Drawings, located to least impair strength of structure, in accordance with the following:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 9
Carlsbad Harding Center
1. Thoroughly clean contact surface by sand blasting entire surface not earlier than 5 days after initial placement.
2. A mix containing same proportion of sand and cement provided in concrete plus a maximum of 50 percent of coarse aggregate shall be placed to a depth of at least one inch on horizontal joints. Vertical joints shall be wetted and coated with a neat cement grout immediately before placing of new concrete.
3. Should contact surface become coated with earth, sawdust, or deleterious material of any kind after being cleaned, entire surface shall be re-cleaned before applying mix.
B. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints where indicated in walks and exterior slabs. Space approximately 20 feet apart, unless otherwise indicated. Joints shall extend entirely through slab with joint filler in one piece for width of walk or slab. Joint filler shall be 3/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Tooled Joints: Slabs, walks and paving shall be marked into areas as indicated with markings made with a V-grooving tool. Marks shall be round-edged, free from burrs or obstructions, with clean cut angles and shall be straight and true. Walks, if not indicated, shall be marked off into rectangles of not more than 12 square feet and shall have a center marking where more than 5 feet wide.
3.6 TESTING
A. Molded Cylinder Tests:
1. Owner Consultant will prepare cylinders. Each cylinder shall be dated, given a number, point in structure from which sample was obtained, mix design number, mix design strength and result of accompanying slump test noted.
2. Separate tests of molded concrete cylinders obtained at same place and time shall be made at age of 3 days, 7 days, and 28 days. A strength test shall be the average of the compressive strength of 2 cylinders, obtained from the same sample of concrete and tested at 28 days or at test age designated for determination of f'c.
3. Test cylinders shall be prepared at the Project site and stored in testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM C 31 and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39.
B. Core Test: At request of the Architect, cores of hardened concrete shall be cut from portions of hydrated structures for testing, in accordance with CBC and ASTM C 42.
1. Provide 4-inch diameter cores at representative places throughout the structure as designated by the Architect.
2. In general, provide sufficient cores to represent concrete placed with at least one core for each 4,000 square feet of building area, and at least 3 cores total for each Project.
3. Where cores have been removed, fill voids with drypack, and patch the finish to match the adjacent existing surfaces.
C. Concrete Consistency: Measure consistency according to ASTM C143. Test twice each day or partial day's run of the mixer.
D. Adjustment of Mix: If the strength of any grade of concrete for any portion of Work, as indicated by molded test cylinders, fall below minimum 28 days compressive strength specified or indicated, adjust mix design for remaining portion of construction so that resulting concrete meets minimum strength requirements.
E. Defective Concrete:
1. Should strength of any grade of concrete, for any portion of Work indicated by tests of molded cylinders and core tests, fall below minimum 28 days strength specified or
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 10
Carlsbad Harding Center
indicated, concrete will be deemed defective Work and shall be replaced or adequately strengthened in a manner acceptable to the Architect and SEOR.
2. Concrete Work that is not formed as indicated, is not true within 1/250 of span, not true to intended alignment, not plumb or level where so intended, not true to intended grades and levels, contains sawdust shavings, wood, or embedded debris, or does not fully conform to Contract provisions, shall be deemed to be defective Work and shall be removed and replaced.
F. Concrete For Equipment Pads, Mechanical and Electrical Work: Unless otherwise indicated, strength shall be 3,000 psi concrete. Exposed concrete shall be provided with a hand trowel finish with radius corners and edges. Form and place concrete where necessary as described in Section 03 1000: Concrete Forms and Accessories and reinforced as described in Section 03 2000: Concrete Reinforcement. Calcium chloride shall not be furnished in any concrete mix provided for the installation of underground electrical conduits. For concrete encasement of more than one conduit, furnish 3/4 inch to 1 inch aggregate as specified for concrete mix.
3.7 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 11
Carlsbad Harding Center
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Framing with engineered wood products.
3. Roof sheathing.
4. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
5. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
6. Wood furring and grounds.
7. Plywood backing panels.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension.
C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.
3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 2
Carlsbad Harding Center
4. For products receiving waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Wood-preservative-treated wood.
2. Engineered wood products.
3. Shear panels.
4. Power-driven fasteners.
5. Powder-actuated fasteners.
6. Expansion anchors.
7. Metal framing anchors.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire- retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 3
Carlsbad Harding Center
C. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project.
1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction yse Category UC3b for exterior construction. No lumber may be in contact with the ground.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.
5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade.
1. Application: Interior partitions not indicated as load-bearing.
2. Species:
a. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
b. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
c. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
d. Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA.
e. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
f. Northern species; NLGA.
g. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.
h. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
B. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 1 or better grade.
1. Species:
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 4
Carlsbad Harding Center
a. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
2.4 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS.
A. Engineered Wood Products, General: Products shall contain no urea formaldehyde and comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of engineered wood product from single source from a single manufacturer.
C. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Use products and manufacturers set forth on the drawings, or approved equal. Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.
1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 3100 psi for 12-inch nominal-depth members.
2. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi.
3. Provide performance-rated product complying with APA PRR-401, rim board plus grade, factory marked with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance with APA standard.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
5. Furring.
6. Grounds.
7. Utility shelving.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber and any of the following species:
1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:
1. Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB.
2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 5
Carlsbad Harding Center
3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
4. Eastern softwoods; No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA.
5. Northern species; No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.
6. Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.
E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged or better, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M, unless noted on the drawings as stainless steel (use Type 304 stainless steel).
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4).
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 6
Carlsbad Harding Center
2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Manufacturers: Use products and manufacturers set forth on the drawings, or approved equal.
B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those that may be indicated on the drawings.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
D. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high- strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick.
1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.
E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304 or Type 316 unless specified otherwise on the drawings.
1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
F. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch-long seat and 1-1/4-inch-wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth.
1. Thickness: 0.062 inch.
G. I-Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch-long seat and 1-1/4-inch-wide nailing flanges full depth of joist. Nailing flanges provide lateral support at joist top chord.
1. Thickness: 0.062 inch.
H. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member.
1. Strap Width: 2 inches.
2. Thickness: 0.062 inch.
I. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.050 inch thick, length to suit joist size and spacing.
J. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch above base and with 2-inch-minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch thick, and standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch thick.
K. Joist Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports.
1. Width: 1-1/4 inches.
2. Thickness: 0.062 inch.
3. Length: 24 inches unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 7
Carlsbad Harding Center
L. Rafter Tie-Downs: Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 1-1/2 inches wide by 0.050 inch thick.[ Tie fastens to side of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below.
M. Rafter Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 2-1/4 inches wide by 0.062 inch thick. Tie fits over top of rafter or truss and fastens to both sides of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below.
N. Floor-to-Floor Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying upper floor wall studs to band joists and lower floor studs, 1-1/4 inches wide by 0.050 inch thick by 36 inches long.
O. Hold-Downs: Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to foundation walls with anchor bolts or to other hold-downs with threaded rods and designed with first of two bolts placed seven bolt diameters from reinforced base.
1. Bolt Diameter: 3/4 inch.
2. Width: 3-3/16 inches.
3. Body Thickness: 0.138 inch.
4. Base Reinforcement Thickness: 0.239 inch.
P. Wall Bracing: T-shaped bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 1-1/8 inches wide by 9/16 inch deep by 0.034 inch thick with hemmed edges.
Q. Wall Bracing: Angle bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 15/16 by 15/16 by 0.040 inch thick with hemmed edges.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1-inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
B. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
C. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.
D. Adhesives for Gluing, Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
E. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2- propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 8
Carlsbad Harding Center
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.
E. Shear Wall Panels: Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.
G. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls.
H. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
I. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.
J. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:
1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.
2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal-thickness.
3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions.
4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c.
K. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 9
Carlsbad Harding Center
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
L. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
M. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.
N. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
O. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.
1. Comply with fastener patterns shown on the drawings. Before fastening, mark fastener locations, using a template made of sheet metal, plastic, or cardboard.
2. Use common nails unless otherwise indicated. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads.
3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
D. Coordinate roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.
E. Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.
F. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Roof Sheathing:
a. Nail to wood framing per structural drawings.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 10
Carlsbad Harding Center
3.3 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
D. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3.4 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work.
B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal-size furring horizontally and vertically at 24 inches o.c.
C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board and Plaster Lath: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal-size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c.
END OF SECTION 061000
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
07 13 26 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 07 1326
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Sheet waterproofing in locations indicated including:
1. Drainage sheets and protection boards.
2. Strip waterproofing at sills, under roof edges, valleys, eaves, ridges, gutters and other flashings as indicated.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
3. Section 04 2200 - Concrete Unit Masonry.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates: Submit a certificate stating applicator is certified by the waterproofing material manufacturer and, upon completion, submit a certificate stating that waterproofing systems have been installed in conformance with reviewed submittals and manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's Product Data including complete installation instructions.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating each condition of the Work. Indicate all adjoining Work, and indicate methods of adhesion and attachment, laps, and related conditions.
D. Samples: Submit Samples, not less than 12-inch square, of each type of composite sheet membrane, mounted on plywood. Submit 12-inch square Samples of each type of drainage and protection board.
E. Experience Record: Submit a list of at least five installations on which each of the materials and systems proposed for installation have been in satisfactory service for at least three years
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. References:
1. ASTM D6506 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Based Protection for Below- Grade Waterproofing.
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
07 13 26 - 2
Carlsbad Harding Center
2. ASTM D6135 - Standard Practice for Application of Self-Adhering Modified Bituminous Waterproofing.
3. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
4. ASTM E154 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover.
B. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Sheet membrane waterproofing system shall be manufactured by a firm with a minimum of 20 years experience in the production of self- adhesive sheet membrane waterproofing.
C. Qualifications of Installer: A firm which has at least three years experience in work of the type required by this section, and is recommended by manufacturer to install the specified products.
D. Pre-Installation Conference and Inspection: After review of submittals but before starting installation of the Work of this section, conduct a meeting at the Project site attended by the Project Inspector, Architect, OAR, Contractor waterproofing applicator and a technical representative of the waterproofing material manufacturer. The waterproofing applicator and material manufacturer's technical representative shall inspect the substrates to receive Work of this section and report defective conditions to Project Inspector, Architect, OAR and Contractor.
E. Manufacturer's Representative: Provide arrangements necessary to have a trained representative of the manufacturer visit the Project site on a weekly basis during membrane waterproofing Work to review installation procedures.
F. Materials shall comply with current State of California and local Air Quality Management District requirements for volatile organic compounds of not over 350 grams per liter.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened packages fully identified with manufacturer's name, trade name, type, class and grade. Each package shall be identified with material name, date of manufacturer and batch number.
B. Store materials at the Project site under cover and maintain in dry condition. Protect from damage from excessive temperature and construction operations. Do not double- stack pallets of membrane. Protect mastic and adhesive from moisture and excessive heat.
C. Store drainage composite or protection board flat and above grade. Provide cover on top and all sides of pallets and provide for adequate ventilation. Protect surface conditioner from freezing.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Install suitable impervious type masking to preclude staining of surfaces to remain exposed wherever waterproofing abuts or laps on to other finish surfaces, and provide additional protection as necessary to supplement masking; cover entire area of building subject to damage or staining.
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
07 13 26 - 3
Carlsbad Harding Center
B. Protect adjacent Work during installation of Work of this Section.
C. Apply sheet waterproofing materials only in dry weather and when outside temperature is within the limits established by the manufacturer of the materials and products used.
D. Do not apply sheet waterproofing materials to damp or wet surfaces unless specifically approved in writing by manufacturer.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall provide a five year material warranty.
B. Installer shall provide a five year labor warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Sheet waterproofing shall be as manufactured by:
1. W.R. Grace & Co., W.R. Meadows, Inc.
2. Protecto Wrap Company.
3. Equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Sheet waterproofing material shall be self-adhesive, cold-applied such as W.R. Grace Bituthene 4000, W.R. Meadows Mel-Rol, Protecto Wrap PW 100/60, or equal. The material shall be a self-adhesive, cold-applied composite sheet consisting of a thickness of 0.056 inches of rubberized asphalt and 0.004 inches of cross-laminated, high density polyethylene film specially formulated for use with water-based surface conditioner. Provide rubberized asphalt membrane covered with a release sheet, which is removed during installation. No special adhesive or heat shall be required to form laps.
B. Surface conditioner: Latex based surface conditioner as recommended by manufacturer
GLENDALE FIRE STATION #23 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING SEISMIC RETROFIT & RENOVATION 071326 - 4
C. Adhesives fillets and sealers: Types as recommended by manufacturer for installation with specified membrane sheet.
D. Prefabricated Drainage Sheet:
1. For vertical surfaces: Hydroduct 220, Mel-Drain 5035B, Protecto Drain 2000-V, or equal, consisting of a dimpled high impact polystyrene core and a needle punched non- woven filter fabric adhered to one side of the core. A film shall be adhered to the other side of the core.
2. For horizontal surfaces: Hydroduct HSF, Mel-Drain 7555, Protecto Drain 2000-V, or equal, consisting of dimpled high impact polystyrene core and an extra heavy woven filter fabric bonded to the core.
E. Protection board for horizontal surfaces shall be 1/8-inch-thick complying with ASTM D6506, semi-rigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect and verify condition of substrates and related Work, in the presence of the manufacturer’s technical representative. Do not start installation of membranes until defects in substrates have been corrected. Concrete shall be smooth, dry, and free of voids. Masonry shall have a parge coat applied.
3.2 PREFABRICATED DRAINAGE SHEET
A. Vertical Surfaces: Install rolls of vertical drainage sheet over the completed membrane, starting at the base of the wall. Peel the fabric back approximately 12 inches from the lower edge.
Where drainage pipe occurs, install the drain core behind the pipe and extend the fabric over the outside of the pipe. Adhere the drainage sheet to the wall using strips of adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Horizontal Surfaces: Adhere the drainage sheet to the membrane with strips of adhesive. Butt adjacent panels together and overlap fabric onto the previous panel. At corners, cut the core and cover the core with filter fabric or tape.
3.3 COMPOSITE STRIP WATERPROOFING
A. Provide at sills, copings, eaves, ridges, and under other flashing as indicated. Do not fold over exposed edges. Prime concrete and masonry surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
Cut the membrane into 10 to 15-foot lengths and reverse roll. Separate membrane from release paper, press firmly into place, and roll to eliminate bubbles and
GLENDALE FIRE STATION #23 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING SEISMIC RETROFIT & RENOVATION 071326 - 4 assure full adhesion. Lap sides of sheets not less than 3.5 inches and ends not less than 6 inches.
3.4 PROTECTION BOARD
A. Cover all surfaces, vertical and horizontal, with protection board, unless indicated otherwise.
Install with adhesive recommended by manufacturer, and compatible with membrane materials.
3.5 TESTS OF MEMBRANES
A. Horizontal membranes shall be subjected to standing water test after completion, but before protection board is applied. Tests shall be conducted as soon as possible after completion of membrane in each area. When membrane installation is completed, seal drain, sandbag perimeter, fill membrane with water to height of not less than 2 inches, pond test for not less than 24 hours, repair all leaks or defects disclosed, and test until results are satisfactory.
Remove all sandbags, plugs and drain when testing is completed. Clean surfaces of membrane.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 62 00 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 07 62 00
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manufactured through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver with counterflashing.
2. Manufactured reglets with counterflashing
3. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
4. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
5. Formed equipment support flashing.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.
B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim.
3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing installation.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 62 00 - 2
Carlsbad Harding Center
and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details.
Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.
3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.
4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.
5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout, and spacing of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
6. Include details of termination points and assemblies.
7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points.
8. Include details of roof-penetration flashing.
9. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable.
10. Include details of special conditions.
11. Include details of connections to adjoining work.
12. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory- applied finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.
1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.
2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.
3. Unit-Type Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.
4. Anodized Aluminum Samples: Samples to show full range to be expected for each color required.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that is SPRI ES-1 tested and FM Approvals approved.
C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 62 00 - 3
Carlsbad Harding Center
maintenance manuals.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance.
1. For copings and roof edge flashings that are SPRI ES-1 tested and FM Approvals approved, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual"
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 62 00 - 4
Carlsbad Harding Center
and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Sheet Metal Standard for Copper: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
D. FM Approvals Listing: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-60. Identify materials with name of fabricator and design approved by FM Approvals.
E. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure:
1. Design Pressure: 30 psf.
F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat surface.
1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; with smooth, flat surface.
1. Finish: 2D (dull, cold rolled).
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt; nonperforated.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 62 00 - 5
Carlsbad Harding Center
B. Synthetic Underlayment: Laminated or reinforced, woven polyethylene or polypropylene, synthetic roofing underlayment; bitumen free; slip resistant; suitable for high temperatures over 220 deg F; and complying with physical requirements of ASTM D 226/D 226M for Type I and Type II felts.
C. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip- resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.
1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F or higher.
2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F or lower.
D. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. minimum.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.
c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.
2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
3. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane and silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 62 00 - 6
Carlsbad Harding Center
movement.
F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.
G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.
H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.5 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. Through-Wall, Ribbed, Sheet Metal Flashing: Manufacture through-wall sheet metal flashing for embedment in masonry, with ribs at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to provide integral mortar bond. Manufacture through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face to receive counterflashing.
1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.
B. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory- mitered and -welded corners and junction and with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet.
1. Material: Stainless steel, 0.019 inch thick; Aluminum, 0.024 inch thick.
2. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge.
3. Stucco Type: Provide with upturned fastening flange and extension leg of length to match thickness of applied finish materials.
4. Concrete Type: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete forms, and guides to ensure alignment of reglet section ends.
5. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint.
6. Accessories:
a. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing.
b. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing's lower edge.
7. Finish: Mill and where exposed with manufacturer's standard color coating.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 62 00 - 7
Carlsbad Harding Center
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8- inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."
D. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
E. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.
F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard and by FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
H. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
I. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.
J. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer.
K. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
2.7 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors.
1. Fabricated Hanger Style: to match existing in according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
2. Manufactured Hanger Style: to match existing in according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 62 00 - 8
Carlsbad Harding Center
3. Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Aluminum: 0.024 inch thick.
2.8 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Roof Edge Flashing: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 12-foot long sections.
Furnish with 6-inch wide, joint cover plates. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.
1. Joint Style: [Overlapped, 4 inches wide. Butted with expansion space and 6-inch wide, concealed backup plate.
2. Fabricate with scuppers spaced 10 feet apart, to dimensions required with 4-inch wide flanges and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper.
3. Fabricate from the Following Materials:
a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.
b. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.
B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 12-foot long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, fasten and seal watertight. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.
1. Coping Profile: To match existing in according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
2. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch wide, concealed backup plate.
3. Fabricate from the Following Materials:
a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.
C. Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.
2. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.
D. Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.
2. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.
E. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.
2. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.
F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.
G. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.
2.9 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 62 00 - 9
Carlsbad Harding Center
A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 12-foot long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings; and form with 2-inch high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.
B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch high, end dams.
Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.
2. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.
3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.
B. Synthetic Underlayment: Install synthetic underlayment, wrinkle free, according to manufacturers' written instructions, and using adhesive where possible to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal.
C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 62 00 - 10
Carlsbad Harding Center
staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
D. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, over underlayment before installing sheet metal flashing and trim.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners.
Bend tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks.
5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure- treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.
2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.
F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.
1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 62 00 - 11
Carlsbad Harding Center
members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant.
When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
G. Rivets: Provide rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.
3.4 ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.
B. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints.
1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.
2. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building.
3. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system.
C. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration indicated.
Lap joints minimum of 4 inches in direction of water flow.
3.5 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.
B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch centers.
C. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for FM Approvals' listing for required windstorm classification.
D. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated.
1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 24-inch centers.
2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at 24-inch centers.
E. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FM Global
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 62 00 - 12
Carlsbad Harding Center
Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified FM Approvals' listing for required windstorm classification.
F. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
G. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches. Secure in waterproof manner by means of interlocking folded seam or blind rivets and sealant at 36-inch centers unless otherwise indicated.
H. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.
3.6 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings.
3.7 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member.
B. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Suspend pans from structure above, independent of other overhead items such as equipment, piping, and conduit, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
Pipe and install drain line to plumbing waste or drainage system.
3.8 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."
3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 62 00 - 13
Carlsbad Harding Center
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
C. Clean off excess sealants.
D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.
E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 076200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 62 00 - 14
Carlsbad Harding Center
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00-1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Silicone joint sealants.
2. Urethane joint sealants.
3. Latex joint sealants.
4. Preformed joint sealants.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Product test reports.
C. Warranties.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Low-Emitting Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00-2
Carlsbad Harding Center
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BASF Building Systems.
b. Dow Corning Corporation.
c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones.
d. May National Associates, Inc.
e. Pecora Corporation.
f. Polymeric Systems, Inc.
g. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
h. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division.
i. Tremco Incorporated.
2. Type: Single component (S).
3. Grade: Nonsag (NS).
4. Class: 100/50.
5. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic (T).
2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Urethane Joint Sealant : ASTM C 920.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BASF Building Systems.
b. Bostik, Inc.
c. Lymtal, International, Inc.
d. May National Associates, Inc.
e. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.
f. Pecora Corporation.
g. Polymeric Systems, Inc.
h. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
i. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division.
j. Tremco Incorporated.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00-3
Carlsbad Harding Center
2. Type: Single component (S).
3. Grade: Nonsag (NS).
4. Class: 100/50.
5. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic (T).
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems.
b. Bostik, Inc.
c. May National Associates, Inc.
d. Pecora Corporation.
e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
f. Tremco Incorporated.
2.5 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. (160 kg/cu. m) and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals.
b. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.
c. Sandell Manufacturing Co.
d. Schul International, Inc.
e. Willseal USA, LLC.
2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material) and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00-4
Carlsbad Harding Center
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint- sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.
C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00-5
Carlsbad Harding Center
D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.
B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.
Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
3.4 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces
1. Joint Locations:
a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Tile control and expansion joints.
c. Other joints as indicated.
2. Joint Sealant: Silicone.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows, and, louvers where occur.
c. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00-6
Carlsbad Harding Center
d. Other joints as indicated.
2. Joint Sealant: Urethane.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Other joints as indicated.
2. Joint Sealant: Preformed foam.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of walls and partitions. e. Joints on underside of plant-precast structural concrete beams and planks. f. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows.
g. Other joints as indicated.
2. Joint Sealant: Latex.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
E. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Sealant Location:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.
c. Other joints as indicated.
2. Joint Sealant: Silicone.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
END OF SECTION 07 9200
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00-7
Carlsbad Harding Center
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 13 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 09 91 13
EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on
1. Exterior substrates:
2. The following substrates:
a. Portland Cement Plaster (stucco)
b. Ferrous Metal
c. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated)
d. Wood
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523
C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
H. EG: Ethylene Glycol. Ethylene glycol is listed as a hazardous air pollutant (HAP) by the I. U.S. EPA
J. Blocking: Two painted surfaces sticking together such as a painted door sticking to a painted jamb.
K. RAVOC: Reactivity adjusted VOC ‘Reactivity’ means the ability of a VOC to promote ozone formation.
L. PDCA: Painting & Decorating Contractors of America www.pdca.org M. SSPC: Scopes of SSPC Surface Preparation Standards and Specifications.
N. Owner – usage of the term “Owner” shall be construed to mean the actual owner of the Property or a duly authorized representative of the owner.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 13 - 2
Carlsbad Harding Center
O. Property – usage of the term “Property” shall be construed to mean the property location identified in paragraph 1.1 B. 1. of this specification at which location the work shall be performed.
P. Painting Contractor – usage of the term “Contractor” shall be construed to mean the 3rd party contractor performing the painting portion of the project.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, no smaller than 7 inches by 10 inches (177.8 mm by 254 mm) or larger than 8.5 inches by 11 inches (215.9 mm by 279.4 mm).
2. Label each Sample for project, owner’s agent, general contractor, painting contractor, paint color name and number, paint brand name, 'P' number if applicable, and application area.
D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas.
2. VOC content.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials from the same product run that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Ten [10] percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Owner’s agent will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 13 - 3
Carlsbad Harding Center
b. Other Items: owner’s agent will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by owner’s agent at a cost to be agreed upon by Contractor and Owner.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the paint systems indicated unless owner’s agent specifically approves such deviations in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C) or more than 120 deg F (49 deg C).
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Surfaces must be clean and moisture free. Prime and paint as soon as possible. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist. No painting shall be done immediately after rain or foggy weather or when the temperature is below 50 °F. Substrate temperature must be 5 °F or more above dew point temperature while painting and during the coating’s cure time. Avoid painting surfaces while they are exposed to a full, hot sun.
B. Painting contractor should follow proper painting practices and exercise judgment based on his or her experience and project specific conditions as to when to proceed.
C. WIND VELOCITY: Excessive wind velocity can seriously impair spray application, resulting in significant material loss, low film build, excessive dry spray or overspray, plus the possibility of depositing airborne spray mist on unprotected surfaces down wind from the work. Some of these adverse effects can be compensated for by material and equipment adjustments if winds are not too high. Generally speaking, wind velocity 15 m.p.h. or higher can cause sufficient spray application problems, in which case suspending work until conditions improve should be considered.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 13 - 4
Carlsbad Harding Center
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Sherwin Williams . Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products manufactured or distributed by the Sherman Williams Corporation, Dunn Edwards, Pratt and Lambert Paints or approved equal.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Colorants: The use of colorants containing hazardous chemicals, such as ethylene glycol, is prohibited.
D. Colors: Match Existing or as Selected by owner's agent from manufacturer's full range.
1. Where color is selected prior to bid submittal, Contractor shall bid two (2), or more finish coats, as appropriate to the color selected, and shall expressly state number of finish and prime coats and type (full or spot) of prime coat.
2. When the final color has not been selected prior to bid submittal, Contractor may need to bid additional coats when submitting their bid. The Owner should be aware that if a color is chosen following the bid process and the color is significantly different from original color, a change order for an additional finish coat might be required.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:
C. Exterior Substrates:
3. Concrete: 11 percent or less.
4. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 11 percent or less.
5. Wood: 15 percent or less.
6. Plaster: 5 percent or less.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 13 - 5
Carlsbad Harding Center
D. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured, including pH testing to determine that alkalinity is within limits established by the manufacturer.
E. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.
G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Scraping or sanding surfaces of older buildings (especially pre -1978) may release dust containing lead or asbestos. EXPOSURE TO LEAD OR ASBESTOS CAN BE VERY HAZARDOUS TO YOUR HEALTH. Always wear appropriate personal protective equipment during surface preparation, and finish cleanup of any residues by water- washing all surfaces.
For more information, see Dunn -Edwards brochure on “Surface Preparation Safety” or call EPA’s National Lead Information Hotline at 1 -800-424- LEAD, or visit www.epa.gov/lead or/asbestos, or contact your state or local Health Department.
C. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.
D. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and re-prime substrate with compatible primers or apply bond coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
E. Where mildew is present, remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial mildew remover, or, with a solution of one (1) part household bleach mixed in three (3) parts water by volume.
The solution should be left on the surface for a minimum of twenty (20) minutes, rinsed thoroughly with clean water to remove any residue, and then allowed to dry completely prior to application of patching/caulking/prime/finish coat systems.
F. Moisture: All areas that may cause paint failure due to moisture shall be addressed and eliminated. This would include, but is not limited to:
1. Gutters and downspouts not working properly.
2. Previous coats of paint not adhering properly.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 13 - 6
Carlsbad Harding Center
3. Wood checking (cracks and splits in wood).
4. Deteriorated caulking.
5. Gaps between substrates.
6. Rotten wood.
7. Areas affected by water splashing.
8. Painting in inclement weather.
9. Painting a substrate where residual moisture exceeds limits stated in 3.1.B.
10. Un-caulked nail holes.
G. Pressure washing and surface preparation methods
1. Pressure wash or water blast to remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and loose paint at pressures of 2500-3500 p.s.i. at a flow of 3.0-3.5 gallons per minute. This is the recommended standard for optimal efficiency.
H. Prior to application of prime/finish interior and/or exterior coat systems, provide a clean, sound surface free of dust, dirt contaminants, mildew and efflorescence by use of a power wash and hand scraping or use of mechanical grinders where necessary. Additionally, areas are to be scrubbed with a bristle brush to insure complete removal of any residual salts. Remove all labels, stickers, price tags, etc. from surfaces before priming. Wood areas stamped with ink codes must be spot primed with blocking primers. Power wash areas to be coated to ensure that new salt deposits do not occur. Failure to do so may cause adhesion issues or result in delamination and invalidate any manufacturer warranty given or implied. After cleaning if there is still chalk evident, this condition must be brought to the owner’s attention in writing before any further work is done.
I. Cementitious Substrates: (concrete, stucco, masonry) Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instruct ions.
1. Wire brush all loose and peeling paint and dust all surfaces before spot priming or applying finish coats. Industry standards apply to applications of cracks, voids, and repairs. Any areas of repair shall be patched and dried before coatings are app lied.
Cracks should be repaired as follows: 1. Cracks less than ¼” wide should be filled using Dunn-Edwards Brush Grade or approved equal Elastomeric Patch. 2. Cracks wider than ¼“should be cut and scraped to a “V” shape and filled with Dunn-Edwards Trowel
2. Grade Elastomeric Patch. Large cracks and holes may require repeated applications of patching materials to bring flush with adjacent substrate. Feather -in all repairs and caulking to blend with adjacent substrate.
3. Large holes in stucco / plaster/ concrete will be patched with Rapid Set Premium Stucco Patch or Rapid Set Wunderfixx Concrete Patching Compound in appropriate texture to blend with existing texture. Allow stucco patch to cure to acceptable pH level
4. (10) prior to application of prime/finish coat systems. Caulk large cracks in stucco / plaster/ cement with GE-Life Time 920 or approved equal.
5. Spot prime over all patched areas, cracks, and holes then use an appropriate topping material to match existing surface level and texture.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 13 - 7
Carlsbad Harding Center
J. All Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing.
a. SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning."
b. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
c. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
1. All ferrous metals should be thoroughly cleaned and all loose rust or mill scale be removed by wire brush, scraper and/or power tool, such as an electric drill with a wire brush attachment. Any rust spots or bare metal should receive the appropriate prime coat. Rust inhibited primer to be applied on all properly prepared surfaces where rust is evident. Any hard, glossy surfaces should be dulled. Previously painted ferrous metal in sound condition should be washed down with a strong detergent -type cleaner such as Krud-Kutter or Simple Green.
2. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
3. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
a. All galvanized gutters and flashing should be thoroughly cleaned to remove loose and peeling paint.
b. Any bare galvanized metal should be wiped down with a non-petroleum solvent cleaner.
c. Prime bare metal with the specified galvanized metal primer. d. Any rust on galvanized metal must be removed. Clean to bare metal and apply a rust inhibitive primer.
4. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. The number of coats scheduled is the minimum number of coats required. Additional coat(s) shall be applied at no additional cost to the Owner, to completely hide base material, provide uniform color, and to produce satisfactory finish results.
3. Apply coatings without thinning except as specifically required by label directions, or required by these specifications. In such cases, thinning shall be the minimum reduction permitted.
4. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
5. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 13 - 8
Carlsbad Harding Center
frames.
6. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes.
7. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
8. Priming may not be required on items delivered with prime or shop coats, unless otherwise specified. Touch up prime coats applied by others as required ensuring an even primed surface before applying finish coat.
B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
E. Block Fillers: Provide block fill as scheduled to conform to the following PDCA Standard P12-
05. a. Level 3 - Premium fill: One or multiple coats of high performance block filler manufactured to be applied at a high dry film build. Block filler shall be back - rolled to eliminate voids and reduce the majority of the masonry profile depth.
F. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:
1. Paint the following work where exposed to view:
a. Equipment, including panel boards.
b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 13 - 9
Carlsbad Harding Center
additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by owner’s agent, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Prepare, paint and finish all surfaces specified and agreed upon.
1. Provide paint finishes of even uniform color, free from cloudy or muddled appearance.
2. Properly correct all non -complying work to the satisfaction of owner and owner’s representative and the representative of the paint manufacturer.
3. Finish all surfaces in accordance with the following schedule. Catalog product names and numbers refer to products as manufactured by the Dunn Edwards Company or approved equal, Los Angeles, California. Catalog color names and numbers refer to products as indicated in Drawing. Color not indicated, to be chosen by Architect from Manufacture standard color selection. Paint application finish schedule:
B. EXTERIOR SURFACES; PT-10 (Ferrous Metal):
1. Metal Stair, Railing, Gate, Exposed Metal Framing: Semi-gloss Finish (Total dry film thickness shall be no less than 4.5 mils):
1st Coat: Devoe Bar-Rust 235V Multi-Purpose Epoxy Coating or approved equal 2nd Coat: Devthane 379H or approved
equal Polyurethane
3rd Coat: Devthane 379H Polyurethane
or approved equal
SPECIAL NOTES AND INSTRUCTIONS:
1. MINIMAL PREPARATION For coatings requiring only minimal surface preparation, the surface needs to be prepared in accordance to SSPC-SP 1 and SSPC-SP 2 or SSPC-SP
3. Tightly adhered rust and or previous coating can remain provided it cannot be removed by lifting with a dull putty knife using moderate pressure. Use SSPC -SP 7 (NACE 4) to expedite the preparation of large areas.
2. The areas of rust that have deteriorated the fence to the point of holes in the substrate will need to be replaced prior to painting.
3. Due to the severe deterioration of many areas of the fence examination and correct
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 13 - 10
Carlsbad Harding Center
preparation of the substrate is crucial to the success of the paint project.
4. For lead safety refer to 3.2 B. and Dunn -Edwards or approved equal PI sheets under Special Instructions.
C. EXTERIOR SURFACES; PT-11 (Cement Plaster):
1. Cement Plaster (Stucco): Flat Finish (Total dry film thickness shall be no less than 4.5 mils):
Primer: EFF-STOP Select Masonry Primer/Sealer (ESSL00)
1st Coat: SPARTASHIELD or approved equal, Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat Paint (SSHL10)
2nd Coat: SPARTASHIELD or approved equal, Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat Paint (SSHL10)
SPECIAL NOTES AND INSTRUCTIONS:
1. On previously painted surfaces, wash, patch, and prime exposed areas. Fill and caulk voids, seams, and joints, especially around doors and windows to prevent moisture intrusion (if applicable). Surface must be dry and free of dirt, grease, and oil. Protect areas not being painted.
D. EXTERIOR SURFACES; PT-12 (Aluminum):
1. Unpainted Aluminum Metal: Flat Finish (Total dry film thickness shall be no less than
4.5 mils):
1st Coat: GALV-ALUM or approved equal Epoxy Galvanized/Aluminum Metal Primer (43-7) 2nd Coat: SPARTASHIELD or approved equal, Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat Paint (SSHL10)
3rd Coat: SPARTASHIELD or approved equal, Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat Paint (SSHL10)
SPECIAL NOTES AND INSTRUCTIONS:
1. Any chalkiness needs to be removed, must be washed and scrubbed off, and any flaking and/or peeling paint must be removed.
2. Surface must be dry and free of dirt, grease, and oil.
3. Protect areas not being painted.
E. EXTERIOR SURFACES;
1. Steel, Galvanized Steel, Non-Ferrous Metal, or Wood 1st Coat, Primer: Tnemec Steel, Series 1 or approved equal Galvanized Steel and Non-Ferrous Metal: Tnemec Series 27 or approved equal WB Wood: Tnemec Series 10-99W or approved equal
2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 2HS, Low VOC Tneme-Gloss or approved equal 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 2HS, Low VOC Tneme-Gloss or approved equal
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 13 - 11
Carlsbad Harding Center
END OF SECTION 09 91 13
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 13 - 12
Carlsbad Harding Center
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 23 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Transition fittings.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Mechanical sleeve seals.
5. Sleeves.
6. Escutcheons.
7. Grout.
8. Mechanical demolition.
9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
10. Painting and finishing.
11. Concrete bases.
12. Supports and anchorages.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within concrete pipe trench and unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 2
Carlsbad Harding Center
A. Product Data: For the following if proposed to be used on this project:
1. Transition fittings.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Escutcheons.
B. Welding certificates.
1. Certificates shall be applicable for materials to be joined at the job-site.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." ASME Section VIII.
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
D. Piping penetration through fire-rated construction assemblies, including accessory components; sleeves, sealants, packing materials and methods, and installation shall meet the requirements of the CBC, and shall be California State Fire Marshal approved.
Firestopping details shall bear the UL label, indicate F-rating, T-rating, and shall meet the requirements of the California Building Code.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." Coordinate to avoid access panels at hard lid ceiling if possible. Access panel shall be located in accessible area for maintenance convenience and safety and limit disturbance to the public.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 3
Carlsbad Harding Center
D. Coordinate with other sections of the specifications for the applicability of materials specified in this section. Not every product or material listed may be used.
E. Coordinate requirements of this section with actual work to be performed. This section is general in scope for basic materials and methods, all of which may not actually apply to this project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: Bolts shall be United States Customary System bolts and nuts (e.g. ¾”). Metric bolts and nuts shall not be used. Bolts and nuts shall be stainless steel with heavy hex nuts. For HTW applications, bolts shall meet ASTM A193 Grade B7 and nuts shall meet ASTM A194 Grade 2H.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general- duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 4
Carlsbad Harding Center
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div.
c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries.
e. Smith-Blair, Inc.
f. Viking Johnson.
g. Or equal.
2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.
3. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling.
4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.
B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent- cement-joint end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Eslon Thermoplastics.
b. Or equal.
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Thompson Plastics, Inc.
b. Or equal.
D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
1. Manufacturers:
a. NIBCO INC.
b. NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div.
c. Or equal.
2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 5
Carlsbad Harding Center
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Shall not be used. Provide 6” long brass nipple with brass unions. Or brass union and bronze ball valve on ends of nipple.
D. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Central Plastics Company.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
e. Or equal.
2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corp.
c. Or equal.
F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Perfection Corp.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Victaulic Co. of America.
e. Or equal.
2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
e. Thunderline Modular Seals; Link-Seal
f. Or equal.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
5. Link-Seal shall be basis of design.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 6
Carlsbad Harding Center
2.7 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. Acceptable only for concrete foundation walls below grade.
F. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome- plated finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass
E. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
F. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.9 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 7
Carlsbad Harding Center
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings or custom bends for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep- pattern type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One- piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-brass finish.
g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.
2. Existing Piping: Use the following:
a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.
b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips.
c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split- casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.
d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 8
Carlsbad Harding Center
e. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type. f. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate type.
M. Mounting hardware, including nuts, bolts and washers for outdoor applications and below grade applications must be of stainless steel materials.
N. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes, except in Group L occupancy, and other locations where spill control is needed.
O. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. b. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors for areas indicated on fire code drawings as “Group L Occupancy” 4 inches above finished floor level, including slabs on grade.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For Group L occupancies, mechanical rooms, and wet area applications where spill containment is required. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For applications not requiring spill containment. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
d. Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
5. Where required, sleeve application and installation shall comply with UL approved Firestopping Detail.
6. Coordinate requirements of sound-proofing caulk, as determined by the Sound and Vibration Consultant’s recommendations.
Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve.
Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials per UBC
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 9
Carlsbad Harding Center
requirements. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for material and installation requirements. Piping penetration through fire-rated construction assemblies, including accessory components; sleeves, sealants, packing materials and methods, and installation shall conform to Underwriters Laboratories Listed firestop systems.
S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
T. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.
U. Install valves in readily accessible locations, avoiding hard-lid ceilings where possible.
Provide access panels for valve access complying with Division 08, and coordinate access panel locations with other disciplines.
3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D. Oxyacetylene torch welding, and cutting of structural steel or bolt holes shall not be permissible.
E. Install main and branch piping using specified fittings, “T-drill”, “welded nozzles”, or “Side- Tap” or similar fitting substitution style connections are not acceptable.
F. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
G. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
H. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
I. Welded Joints: See Section 23 0511 “Welding Pressure Piping.”
J. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 10
Carlsbad Harding Center
K. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.
L. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
M. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
N. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
O. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install shut-off valves at final connection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 1/2 and smaller, at final connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Install flanges, in piping NPS 3 and larger, at final connection to each piece of equipment.
4. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.
5. Wet Piping Systems: Install brass union, ball valve and brass nipple fitting to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces.
C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Grease fittings shall be installed in accessible locations. Extended lube lines are not acceptable.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.5 PAINTING
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 11
Carlsbad Harding Center
A. Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Section "High Performance Coatings."
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.6 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to CBC seismic zone 4 requirements.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, vibration isolator, or seismic restraint. Provide 1 inch chamfer at all corners and round over edge.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. Minimum embedment shall comply with seismic engineer’s calculations.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
D. Outdoor Applications: Outdoor support assemblies and accessories shall be of “stainless steel material”, or “hot-dip galvanized carbon steel with high-performance coatings”, as noted below:
1. Stainless steel: Mounting hardware such as bolts, nuts, washers, straps, brackets, fastening hardware etc., shall be stainless steel.
2. Coated galvanized steel: Carbon steel support assemblies, including all metal fabrications for use outdoors shall comply with each paragraph listed below:
a. Assemblies must be shop-fabricated and pre-assembled for one-piece hot-dip galvanized coating process.
b. After hot-dip galvanized coating is applied, a high-performance exterior coating system shall be applied. Provide High-Performance Exterior Coating Systems conforming to Division 09 “High Performance Coatings”, meeting all performance requirements, including salt spray test performance.
c. Touch-up and repair per manufacturer’s recommendations after field installation.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 12
Carlsbad Harding Center
E. Rooftop Applications: Rooftop support assemblies and accessories shall be fabricated for outdoor applications as noted above, and shall be designed per SMACNA design requirements.
1. SMACNA Clearances: Pipes, pipe racks, and equipment shall be installed high enough above roofing surfaces to allow roofing access for maintenance and repair. Install piping and equipment at a minimum height as shown in Table 4-1 of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual – 5th Edition.
2. SMACNA Support Systems: Piping systems and equipment supports, unless otherwise shown, use round column supports to tie-in to structure with lead jacks for built-up roofs, and single-ply preformed jacks for single-ply roofs, lead flashing, and lead umbrellas with stainless steel draw band per Figure 4-16A, or Figure 4-16B, of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual – 5th Edition.
3.8 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 23 05 00
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 05 13 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 23 05 13
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on alternating- current power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 95 deg F and rated for a coastal environment.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 05 13 - 2
Carlsbad Harding Center
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
I. Insulation: Class F.
J. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
K. Enclosure Material: Totally Enclosed, Fan Cooled. Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.
2.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width-modulated inverters.
2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.
3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.
C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 05 13 - 3
Carlsbad Harding Center
2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 23 05 13
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 05 13 - 4
Carlsbad Harding Center
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
5. Fastener systems.
6. Equipment stands.
7. Equipment supports.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
2. Section 23 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC"
3. Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers.
2. Metal framing systems.
3. Pipe stands.
4. Equipment supports.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 2
Carlsbad Harding Center
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized, hot-dip galvanized, or electro- galvanized.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated, or epoxy powder-coated.
4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping.
5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
B. Stainless Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
2. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping.
3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.
2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 3
Carlsbad Harding Center
2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:
1. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated, pipe-support assembly made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes.
2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
3. Channels: Continuous slotted carbon-steel channel with inturned lips.
4. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria.
5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of galvanized steel.
7. Metallic Coating: Pregalvanized G90.
2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100- psi or ASTM C591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psi minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.
B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psi ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psi or ASTM C591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psi minimum compressive strength.
C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.
2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type anchors for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
1. Indoor Applications: Zinc-coated or stainless steel.
2. Outdoor Applications: Stainless steel.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 4
Carlsbad Harding Center
2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.
2.8 OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT STANDS
1. Description: Individual foot supports with elevated adjustable channel cross bars and clamps/fasteners/bolts for ground or roof supported outdoor equipment components, without roof membrane penetration, in a pre-fabricated system that can be modularly-assembled on site.
2. Foot Material: Rubber or polypropylene.
3. Rails Material: Hot dip galvanized carbon steel.
4. Wind/Sliding Load Resistance: Up to 100 mph minimum.
2.9 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B221.
B. Carbon Steel: ASTM A1011/A1011M.
C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; galvanized.
D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M.
E. Threaded Rods: Continuously threaded. Zinc-plated or galvanized steel for indoor applications and stainless steel for outdoor applications. Mating nuts and washers of similar materials as rods.
F. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.
B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 5
Carlsbad Harding Center
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.
B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled strut systems.
D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
E. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer.
Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Pipe Stand Installation:
1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories" for curbs.
G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.
H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 6
Carlsbad Harding Center
concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
N. Insulated Piping:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 7
Carlsbad Harding Center
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 09 91 10 "Interior and Exterior Painting" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.
3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.
Formatted: Left
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 8
Carlsbad Harding Center
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications.
F. Use stainless steel pipe hangers attachments for hostile environment applications.
G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless steel attachments for copper piping and tubing.
H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.
3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
4. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
5. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
6. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
7. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
8. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
9. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
10. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
11. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction.
12. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.
13. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
14. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
15. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
16. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 9
Carlsbad Harding Center
17. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is unnecessary.
18. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is unnecessary.
19. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.
K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar- joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel.
12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 10
Carlsbad Harding Center
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
O. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches.
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load- adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.
P. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
Q. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 11
Carlsbad Harding Center
R. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.
END OF SECTION 23 05 29
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
23 05 48 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 23 05 48
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Elastomeric isolation pads.
2. Pipe-riser resilient support.
3. Resilient pipe guides.
4. Elastomeric hangers.
5. Spring hangers.
6. Snubbers.
7. Restraints - rigid type.
8. Restraints - cable type.
9. Restraint accessories.
10. Post-installed concrete anchors.
11. Concrete inserts.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Designated Seismic System: An HVAC component that requires design in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7, Ch. 13, and for which the Component Importance Factor is greater than 1.0.
B. IBC: International Building Code.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.
2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of vibration isolation device and seismic restraint component.
3. Annotate types and sizes of seismic restraints and accessories, complete with listing markings or report numbers and load rating in tension and compression as evaluated by ICC-ES product listing UL product listing FM Approvals.
4. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.
5. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
23 05 48 - 2
Carlsbad Harding Center
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation and seismic bracing for HVAC piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and restraints, if any.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Seismic Qualification Data: Provide special certification for designated seismic systems as indicated in ASCE/SEI 7-05, ASCE/SEI 7-10, ASCE/SEI 7-16, Paragraph 13.2.2, "Special Certification Requirements for Designated Seismic Systems" for all Designated Seismic Systems identified as such on Drawings or in the Specifications.
1. Provide equipment manufacturer's written certification for each designated active mechanical seismic device and system, stating that it will remain operable following the design earthquake. Certification must be based on requirements of ASCE/SEI 7 and AHRI 1270, including shake table testing per ICC-ES AC156 or a similar nationally recognized testing standard procedure acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide equipment manufacturer's written certification that components with hazardous contents maintain containment following the design earthquake by methods required in ASCE/SEI 7-05, ASCE/SEI 7-10, ASCE/SEI 7-16.
3. Submit evidence demonstrating compliance with these requirements for approval to authorities having jurisdiction after review and acceptance by a licensed professional engineer.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct testing indicated, be an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and be acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C. Seismic -Restraint Device Load Ratings: Devices to be tested and rated in accordance with applicable code requirements and authorities having jurisdiction. Devices to be listed by a nationally recognized third party that requires periodic follow-up inspections and has a listing directory available to the public. Provide third-party listing by one or more of the following: ICC-ES product listing UL product listing FM Approvals.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
23 05 48 - 3
Carlsbad Harding Center
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS
A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads:
1. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading over pad area.
2. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment.
3. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties. Neoprene rubber, silicone rubber, or other elastomeric material.
4. Surface Pattern: Smooth, ribbed, or waffle pattern.
5. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.
6. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.
7. Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric.
a. Surface Pattern: Smooth, ribbed, or waffle pattern.
b. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.
2.2 PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT
A. All-Directional, Acoustical Pipe Anchor Consisting of Two Steel Tubes Separated by a Minimum 1/2-inch- Thick Neoprene:
1. Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions.
2. Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psig on isolation material providing equal isolation in all directions.
2.3 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES
A. Telescopic Arrangement of Two Steel Tubes or Post and Sleeve Arrangement Separated by a Minimum 1/2-inch- Thick Neoprene:
1. Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.
2.4 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS
A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods:
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Damping Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel contact.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
23 05 48 - 4
Carlsbad Harding Center
2.5 SPRING HANGERS
A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in Compression:
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer- reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded rod.
8. Self-centering hanger-rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil.
2.6 SNUBBERS
A. Description: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.
1. Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts: Secure to concrete surface with post- installed concrete anchors. Anchors to be seismically prequalified in accordance with ACI 355.2 testing and designated in accordance with ACI 318-08 Appendix D for 2009 IBC ACI 318-11 Appendix D for 2012 IBC ACI 318-14 Ch. 17 for 2015 or 2018 IBC.
2. Preset Concrete Inserts: Seismically prequalified in accordance with ICC- ES AC446 testing.
3. Anchors in Masonry: Design in accordance with TMS 402.
4. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
5. Resilient Cushion: Maximum 1/4-inch air gap, and minimum 1/4 inch thick.
2.7 RESTRAINTS - RIGID TYPE
A. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of AISI S110-07-S1 slotted steel channels, ANSI/ASTM A53/A53M steel pipe as per NFPA 13, or other rigid steel brace member. Includes accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion- resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
2.8 RESTRAINTS - CABLE TYPE
A. Seismic-Restraint Cables: ASTM A1023/A1023M galvanized or ASTM A603 galvanized-steel ASTM A492 stainless steel cables. End connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for seismic-restraining
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
23 05 48 - 5
Carlsbad Harding Center
cable service; with fittings attached by means of poured socket, swaged socket or mechanical (Flemish eye) loop.
B. Restraint cable assembly with cable fittings must comply with ASCE/SEI 19. All cable fittings and complete cable assembly must maintain the minimum cable breaking force.
U-shaped cable clips and wedge-type end fittings do not comply and are unacceptable.
2.9 RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES
A. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. Non- metallic stiffeners are unacceptable.
B. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers to rigid channel bracings and restraint cables.
C. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
D. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.
E. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.
2.10 POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE ANCHORS
A. Mechanical Anchor Bolts:
1. Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E488/E488M.
B. Adhesive Anchor Bolts:
1. Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane methacrylate- based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive.
Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E488/E488M.
C. Post-installed concrete anchors must comply with all requirements of ASCE/SEI 7-05, Ch. 13 ASCE/SEI 7-10, Ch. 13 ASCE/SEI 7-16, Ch. 13.
1. Prequalify post-installed anchors in concrete in accordance with ACI 355.2 or other approved qualification testing procedures.
2. Prequalify post-installed anchors in masonry in accordance with approved qualification procedures.
D. Expansion-type anchor bolts are not permitted for equipment in excess of 10 hp that is not vibration isolated.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
23 05 48 - 6
Carlsbad Harding Center
1. Undercut expansion anchors are permitted.
2.11 CONCRETE INSERTS
A. Provide preset concrete inserts that are seismically prequalified in accordance with ICC- ES AC466 testing.
B. Comply with ANSI/MSS SP-58.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength is adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES A. Provide vibration-control devices for systems and equipment where indicated in Equipment Schedules or Vibration-Control Devices Schedules, where indicated on Drawings, or where Specifications indicate they are to be installed on specific equipment and systems.
B. Provide seismic-restraint devices for systems and equipment where indicated in Equipment Schedules or Seismic-Restraint Devices Schedules, where indicated on Drawings, where Specifications indicate they are to be installed on specific equipment and systems, and where required by applicable codes.
C. Coordinate location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
23 05 48 - 7
Carlsbad Harding Center
D. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.
E. Comply with requirements in Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
F. Equipment Restraints:
1. Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators.
Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.
2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component.
G. Piping Restraints:
1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.
2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o.c.
3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.
H. Install seismic restraint cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
I. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component.
J. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
K. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
L. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
M. Mechanical Anchor Bolts:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.
3. Wedge-Type Anchor Bolts: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
23 05 48 - 8
Carlsbad Harding Center
4. Adhesive-Type Anchor Bolts: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.
5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for exterior applications.
3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Provide flexible connections in piping systems where they cross structural seismic joints and other point where differential movement may occur. Provide adequate flexibility to accommodate differential movement as determined in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7.
Comply with requirements in Section 23 21 13 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 23 21 13.1 "Hydronic Piping and Valves" for piping flexible connections.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after system is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained-spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.
2. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless post connection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.
4. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.
5. Test no fewer than four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.
6. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
7. Measure isolator restraint clearance.
8. Measure isolator deflection.
9. Verify snubber minimum clearances.
10. Test and adjust restrained-air-spring isolator controls and safeties.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
23 05 48 - 9
Carlsbad Harding Center
E. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 23 05 48
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 23 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Pipe labels.
3. Valve tags.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.
C. Valve numbering scheme.
D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: stainless steel, 0.025-inch or anodized aluminum,
0.032-inch] minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black.
3. Background Color: Natural
4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.
6. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53 - 2
Carlsbad Harding Center
7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11- inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.2 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.
B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.
2.3 VALVE TAGS
A. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.
1. Tag Material: stainless steel, 0.025-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or beaded chain or S-hook.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53 - 3
Carlsbad Harding Center
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
B. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.
C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Chilled-Water Piping: White letters on a safety-green background.
2. Heating Water Piping: Black letters on a safety-orange background.
3. Refrigerant Piping: Black letters on a safety-white background.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53 - 4
Carlsbad Harding Center
3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn- watering hose connections, and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a. Chilled Water: 1-1/2 inches round.
b. Refrigerant: 1-1/2 inches round.
c. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches round.
2. Valve-Tag Colors:
a. Toxic and Corrosive Fluids: Black letters on a safety-orange background. b. Flammable Fluids: Black letters on a safety-yellow background. c. Combustible Fluids: White letters on a safety-brown background. d. Potable and Other Water: White letters on a safety-green background. e. Compressed Air: White letters on a safety-blue background. f. Defined by User: White letters on a safety-purple background, black letters on a safety-white background, white letters on a safety-gray background, and white letters on a safety-black background END OF SECTION 23 05 53
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Balancing Air Systems:
a. Constant-air-volume systems.
2. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Equipment:
a. Motors.
b. Fan Coil Units
c. Condensing units.
d. Unit Heaters.
e. Heat-transfer coils.
3. Testing, adjusting, and balancing existing systems and equipment.
4. Duct leakage tests.
5. Control system verification.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B. BAS: Building automation systems.
C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.
G. TDH: Total dynamic head.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 2
Carlsbad Harding Center
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. TAB Conference: If requested by the Owner, conduct a TAB conference at Project site after approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details.
1. Minimum Agenda Items:
a. The Contract Documents examination report.
b. The TAB plan.
c. Needs for coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. d. Proposed procedures for documentation and communication flow.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
D. System Readiness Checklists: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit system readiness checklists as specified in "Preparation" Article.
E. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in "Examination" Article.
F. Certified TAB reports.
G. Sample report forms.
H. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:
1. Instrument type and make.
2. Serial number.
3. Application.
4. Dates of use.
5. Dates of calibration.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by AABC.
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC.
2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC as a TAB technician.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 3
Carlsbad Harding Center
B. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by NEBB or TABB.
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB.
2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician.
C. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation."
D. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible.
C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.
F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 4
Carlsbad Harding Center
rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens have been replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations.
L. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of throttling, diverting, or mixing fluid flows.
M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures.
Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following:
1. Equipment and systems to be tested.
2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems.
3. Instrumentation to be used.
4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.
B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following:
1. Airside:
a. Verify that leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
b. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed.
c. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional. d. Clean filters are installed.
e. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. f. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 5
Carlsbad Harding Center
g. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. h. Ceilings are installed.
i. Windows and doors are installed.
j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.
2. Hydronics:
a. Verify leakage and pressure tests on water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
b. Piping is complete with terminals installed.
c. Water treatment is complete.
d. Systems are flushed, filled, and air purged.
e. Strainers are pulled and cleaned.
f. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation. g. Shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100 percent open. h. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified.
i. Pump gage connections are installed directly at pump inlet and outlet flanges or in discharge and suction pipe prior to valves or strainers. j. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified.
k. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" and in this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts.
2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories."
3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 23 07 13 "Duct Insulation," and Section 23 07 19 "HVAC Piping Insulation." C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 6
Carlsbad Harding Center
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts."
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Phase and hertz.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter size and thermal-protection-element rating.
8. Service factor and frame size.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test manual bypass of controller to prove proper operation.
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
A. Verify proper rotation of fans.
B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
C. Record fan and motor operating data.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:
1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 7
Carlsbad Harding Center
2. Water flow rate.
3. Water pressure drop for major (more than 20 gpm) equipment coils, excluding unitary equipment such as reheat coils, unit heaters, and fan-coil units.
4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.
6. Airflow.
B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:
1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
3. Airflow.
3.8 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS
A. Witness the duct pressure testing performed by Installer.
B. Verify that proper test methods are used and that leakage rates are within specified tolerances.
C. Report deficiencies observed.
3.9 CONTROLS VERIFICATION
A. In conjunction with system balancing, perform the following:
1. Verify temperature control system is operating within the design limitations.
2. Confirm that the sequences of operation are in compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Verify that controllers are calibrated and function as intended.
4. Verify that controller set points are as indicated.
5. Verify the operation of lockout or interlock systems.
6. Verify the operation of valve and damper actuators.
7. Verify that controlled devices are properly installed and connected to correct controller.
8. Verify that controlled devices travel freely and are in position indicated by controller: open, closed, or modulating.
9. Verify location and installation of sensors to ensure that they sense only intended temperature, humidity, or pressure.
B. Reporting: Include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and variations from indicated conditions.
3.10 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.
1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.
2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 8
Carlsbad Harding Center
3. Check the refrigerant charge.
4. Check the condition of filters.
5. Check the condition of coils.
6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap.
7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.
8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies.
B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following:
1. New filters are installed.
2. Coils are clean and fins combed.
3. Drain pans are clean.
4. Fans are clean.
5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.
6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.
C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work.
1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.
2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer.
3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.
4. Balance each air outlet.
3.11 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above.
3.12 PROGRESS REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 9
Carlsbad Harding Center
and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.
3.13 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.
1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.
2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data.
B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of the TAB specialist.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 10
Carlsbad Harding Center
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.
Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.
j. Number, make, and size of belts.
k. Number, type, and size of filters.
2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make, and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.
f. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. g. Outdoor airflow in cfm.
h. Return airflow in cfm.
i. Outdoor-air damper position.
j. Return-air damper position.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 11
Carlsbad Harding Center
F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:
1. Coil Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. ft..
h. Tube size in NPS.
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Airflow rate in cfm.
b. Average face velocity in fpm.
c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.
d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Water flow rate in gpm.
i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. j. Entering-water temperature in deg F.
k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.
l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.
n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.
o. Inlet steam pressure in psig.
G. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Fuel type in input data.
g. Output capacity in Btu/h.
h. Ignition type.
i. Burner-control types.
j. Motor horsepower and rpm.
k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.
l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.
m. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
n. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 12
Carlsbad Harding Center
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Entering-air temperature in deg F.
c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
d. Air temperature differential in deg F.
e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg.
f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg.
g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg.
h. Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h.
i. High-fire fuel input in Btu/h.
j. Manifold pressure in psig.
k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F.
l. Operating set point in Btu/h.
m. Motor voltage at each connection.
n. Motor amperage for each phase.
o. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h.
H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.
2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make, and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
g. Number, make, and size of belts.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.
I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data:
a. System and air-handling-unit number.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 13
Carlsbad Harding Center
b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.
d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.
e. Duct size in inches.
f. Duct area in sq. ft..
g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm.
h. Indicated velocity in fpm.
i. Actual airflow rate in cfm.
j. Actual average velocity in fpm.
k. Barometric pressure in psig.
J. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:
1. Unit Data:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.
b. Location and zone.
c. Apparatus used for test.
d. Area served.
e. Make.
f. Number from system diagram.
g. Type and model number.
h. Size.
i. Effective area in sq. ft..
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Airflow rate in cfm.
b. Air velocity in fpm.
c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm.
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.
e. Final airflow rate in cfm.
f. Final velocity in fpm.
g. Space temperature in deg F.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Static head in feet of head or psig.
b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.
c. Actual impeller size in inches.
d. Full-open flow rate in gpm.
e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig.
f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.
g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.
h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.
i. Final water flow rate in gpm.
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.
K. Instrument Calibration Reports:
1. Report Data:
a. Instrument type and make.
b. Serial number.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 14
Carlsbad Harding Center
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.14 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT
A. The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Construction Manager.
B. Construction Manager shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.
C. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."
D. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
E. If TAB work fails, proceed as follows:
1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.
2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB specialist to complete TAB work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB specialist's final payment.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.15 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 23 05 93
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 13 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 23 07 13
DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:
1. Indoor, concealed and exposed supply and outdoor air.
2. Outdoor exposed supply ductwork
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 07 19 "HVAC Piping Insulation."
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water- vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.
2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each type of insulation.
3. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
4. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated.
Include dates of tests and test methods employed.
C. Field quality-control reports.
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 13 - 2
Carlsbad Harding Center
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke- developed index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke- developed index of 150 or less.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application.
Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 13 - 3
Carlsbad Harding Center
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials.
Comply with ASTM C534, Type II for sheet materials.
G. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C553, Type II and ASTM C1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
H. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
2.2 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS
A. Fire-Rated Board: Structural-grade, press-molded, xonolite calcium silicate, fireproofing board suitable for operating temperatures up to 1700 deg F. Comply with ASTM C656, Type II, Grade 6. Tested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is tested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 13 - 4
Carlsbad Harding Center
2.4 MASTICS AND COATINGS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM C755, Section 7.2.2, Table 2, for insulation type and service conditions.
2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.
3. Color: White
C. Vapor-Retarder Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM C755, Section 7.2.2, Table 2, for insulation type and service conditions.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F.
3. Color: White.
D. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96, greater than 1.0 perm at manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
3. Color: White.
2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct insulation.
2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.
3. Color: White.
2.6 SEALANTS
A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
4. Color: Aluminum.
B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
4. Color: White.
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 13 - 5
Carlsbad Harding Center
2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications.
When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.
2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.
3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.
4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.
5. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E96/E96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
2.8 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C1136.
1. Width: 3 inches.
2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C1136.
1. Width: 3 inches.
2. Thickness: 6.5 mils.
3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1. Width: 2 inches.
2. Thickness: 3.7 mils.
3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 5 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
2.9 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 13 - 6
Carlsbad Harding Center
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167 or ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316;
0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
2. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.
3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place.
Comply with the following requirements:
a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
b. Spindle: Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place.
Comply with the following requirements:
a. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
b. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches.
c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
5. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
b. Spindle: Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
c. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 13 - 7
Carlsbad Harding Center
6. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick, stainless-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
7. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from
0.016-inch- thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.
D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.
2.10 CORNER ANGLES
A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.
B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inchthick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.
C. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according to ASTM A167 or ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 13 - 8
Carlsbad Harding Center
B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 13 - 9
Carlsbad Harding Center
N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
1. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.
2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 13 - 10
Carlsbad Harding Center
3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints.
Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 13 - 11
Carlsbad Harding Center
3.7 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.
B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.
C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are specified in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.8 FINISHES
A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.
3.10 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
B. Items Not Insulated:
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 13 - 12
Carlsbad Harding Center
1. Fibrous-glass ducts.
2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Vibration-control devices.
7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
3.11 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
B. Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
C. Exposed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density..
D. Exposed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
3.12 ABOVEGROUND, OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a duct system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Exposed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
C. Exposed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
3.13 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
DUCT INSULATION
23 07 13 - 13
Carlsbad Harding Center
C. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches:
1. Stainless Steel, Type 304 or Type 316 0.020 inch thick.
END OF SECTION 23 07 13
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 23 07 19
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulation for HVAC piping systems.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 07 13 "Duct Insulation" for duct insulation.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.
2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.
3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation.
5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties.
6. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated.
Include dates of tests and test methods employed.
C. Field quality-control reports.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 2
Carlsbad Harding Center
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke- developed index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke- developed index of 150 or less.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.
Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor,
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 3
Carlsbad Harding Center
Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come into contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable in accordance with ASTM C795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Comply with ASTM C552.
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type II, Class 1, without jacket.
2. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type II, Class 2, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL jacket.
3. Factory fabricate shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585.
4. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C534/C534M, Type I for tubular materials, Type II for sheet materials.
H. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C1393.
1. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ jacket.
2. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more.
3. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less.
4. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C195.
B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C196.
C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C449.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 4
Carlsbad Harding Center
C. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F.
D. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Solvent-based adhesive.
1. Flame-spread index shall be 25 or less and smoke-developed index shall be 50 or less as tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Wet Flash Point: Below 0 deg F.
3. Service Temperature Range: 40 to 200 deg F.
4. Color: Black.
E. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
F. ASJ Adhesive and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A, for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
2.4 MASTICS AND COATINGS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Indoor Use: Suitable for indoor use on below- ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249.
2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.
3. Color: White.
C. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Outdoor Use: Suitable for outdoor use on below- ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F.
3. Color: White.
2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Adhesives shall comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.
2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.
3. Color: White.
2.6 SEALANTS
A. Materials shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
B. Joint Sealants:
1. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 5
Carlsbad Harding Center
a. Service Temperature Range: Minus 150 to plus 250 deg F. b. Color: White or gray.
C. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
3. Color: Aluminum.
D. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVDC and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
3. Color: White.
2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications.
When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.
2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.
3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.
2.8 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C1136.
1. Width: 3 inches.
2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C1136.
1. Width: 3 inches.
2. Thickness: 6.5 mils.
3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1. Width: 2 inches.
2. Thickness: 3.7 mils.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 6
Carlsbad Harding Center
3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 5 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
D. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.
1. Width: 3 inches.
2. Film Thickness: 2 mils.
3. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils.
4. Elongation at Break: 120 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 20 psi in width.
E. PVDC Tape for Outdoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.
1. Width: 3 inches.
2. Film Thickness: 6 mils.
3. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils.
4. Elongation at Break: 145 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 55 psi in width.
2.9 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch] wide with wing seal or closed seal.
2. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel, with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size is determined by manufacturer for application.
B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4 inch wide, stainless steel or Monel.
C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 7
Carlsbad Harding Center
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
1. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature of between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
C. Coordinate insulation installation with the tradesman installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses required for each item of pipe system, as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation materials that get wet.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends attached to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 8
Carlsbad Harding Center
3. Install insert materials and insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward-clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self- sealing lap. Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in similar fashion to butt joints.
P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 9
Carlsbad Harding Center
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials, except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, Mechanical Couplings, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, mechanical couplings, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as that of adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive.
Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation,
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 10
Carlsbad Harding Center
or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers, so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below- ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.
6. Insulate flanges, mechanical couplings, and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation to fit. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union" matching size and color of pipe labels.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric- reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing, using PVC tape.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular- glass block insulation of same thickness as that of pipe insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 11
Carlsbad Harding Center
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.
2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as that of pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as that of pipe insulation when available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 12
Carlsbad Harding Center
3.8 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation.
Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.9 FINISHES
A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 13
Carlsbad Harding Center
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless steel jackets.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
D. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.
E. Tests and Inspections: Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
F. All insulation applications will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
G. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Insulation conductivity and thickness per pipe size shall comply with schedules in this Section or with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
B. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Underground piping.
2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.12 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 14
Carlsbad Harding Center
a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick.
b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
B. Chilled Water and Brine, Above 40 Deg F:
1. NPS 12 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick.
b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches thick.
C. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below:
1. NPS 12 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick.
b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 2 inches thick.
D. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
E. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.
F. Refrigerant Liquid Piping:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
3.13 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Chilled Water and Brine:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 3 inchesthick.
b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 3 inches thick.
B. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick.
b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches thick.
C. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 15
Carlsbad Harding Center
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.
D. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.
E. Refrigerant Liquid Piping:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.
END OF SECTION 23 07 19
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
23 08 00 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 23 08 00
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes commissioning process requirements for the following HVAC&R systems, assemblies, and equipment:
1. Heat generation systems, including Split System units.
2. Cooling generation systems, including Split System units.
3. Distribution systems, including air distribution (heating and cooling) systems Refrigerant lines exhaust systems air-handling units.
4. Terminal and packaged units, including fan-coil units packaged units.
5. Controls and instrumentation, including BAS.
6. Systems testing and balancing verification, including refrigerant piping systems supply-air systems return-air systems exhaust-air systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BAS: Building automation system.
B. DDC: Direct digital controls.
C. HVAC&R: Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration.
D. "Systems," "Subsystems," "Equipment," and "Components": Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.
E. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For BAS and HVAC&R Testing Technician.
B. Construction Checklists: See related Sections for technical requirements for the following construction checklists:
1. Vibration and seismic controls for HVAC&R piping and equipment.
2. Instrumentation and control for HVAC&R.
3. Refrigerant piping.
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
23 08 00 - 2
Carlsbad Harding Center
4. Metal ducts and accessories.
5. Fans.
6. Fan Coils and Condensing Units.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. BAS Testing Technician Qualifications: Technicians to perform BAS construction checklist verification tests, construction checklist verification test demonstrations, commissioning tests, and commissioning test demonstrations shall have the following minimum qualifications:
1. Journey-level or equivalent skill level with knowledge of BAS, HVAC&R, electrical concepts, and building operations.
2. Minimum three years' experience installing, servicing, and operating systems manufactured by approved manufacturer.
3. International Society of Automation (ISA) Certified Control Systems Technician (CCST) Level I.
B. HVAC&R Testing Technician Qualifications: Technicians to perform HVAC&R construction checklist verification tests, construction checklist verification test demonstrations, commissioning tests, and commissioning test demonstrations shall have the following minimum qualifications:
1. Journey-level or equivalent skill level. Vocational School four-year program graduate or an Associates degree in mechanical systems, air conditioning, or similar field. Degree may be offset by three years' experience in servicing mechanical systems in the HVAC industry. Generally, required knowledge includes HVAC&R systems, electrical concepts, building operations, and application and use of tools and instrumentation to measure performance of HVAC&R equipment, assemblies, and systems.
2. Minimum three years' experience installing, servicing, and operating systems manufactured by approved manufacturer.
3. One of the following:
a. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Technician.
b. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) Certified Test and Balance Technician.
c. Owner retains the right to waive NEBB or AABC Certification.
C. Testing Equipment and Instrumentation Quality and Calibration: For test equipment and instrumentation required to perform HVAC&R commissioning work, perform the following:
1. Submit test equipment and instrumentation list. For each equipment or instrument, identify the following:
a. Equipment/instrument identification number.
b. Planned commissioning application or use.
c. Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number.
d. Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the equipment and instrumentation.
2. Test equipment and instrumentation shall meet the following criteria:
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
23 08 00 - 3
Carlsbad Harding Center
a. Capable of testing and measuring performance within the specified acceptance criteria.
b. Be calibrated at the manufacturer's recommended intervals with current calibration tags permanently affixed to the instrument being used. c. Be maintained in good repair and operating condition throughout the duration of use on this Project.
d. Be recalibrated/repaired if dropped or damaged in any way since last calibrated.
D. Proprietary Test Instrumentation and Tools:
1. Equipment Manufacturer's Proprietary Instrumentation and Tools: For installed equipment included in the commissioning process, test instrumentation and tools manufactured or prescribed by equipment manufacturer to service, calibrate, adjust, repair, or otherwise work on its equipment or required as a condition of equipment warranty, perform the following:
a. Submit proprietary instrumentation and tools list. For each instrument or tool, identify the following:
1) Instrument or tool identification number.
2) Equipment schedule designation of equipment for which the instrument or tool is required.
3) Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number.
4) Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the instrument or tool, where appropriate.
b. Include a separate list of proprietary test instrumentation and tools in the operation and maintenance manuals.
c. HVAC&R proprietary test instrumentation and tools become the property of Owner at the time of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Certify that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings and submittals.
B. Certify that HVAC&R instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings and submittals, and that pretest set points have been recorded.
C. Certify that TAB procedures have been completed and that TAB reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.
D. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested according to approved test procedures (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions).
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
23 08 00 - 4
Carlsbad Harding Center
E. Measure capacities and effectiveness of systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components, including operational and control functions to verify compliance with acceptance criteria.
F. Test systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and response according to acceptance criteria.
G. Construction Checklists: Prepare and submit detailed construction checklists for HVAC&R systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.
1. Contributors to the development of construction checklists shall include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. HVAC&R systems and equipment installers.
b. TAB technicians.
c. HVAC&R instrumentation and controls installers.
H. Perform tests using design conditions, whenever possible.
1. Simulated conditions may, with approval of Architect, be imposed using an artificial load when it is impractical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by Commissioning Coordinator and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return configurations and settings to normal operating conditions.
2. Commissioning test procedures may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is impractical.
3. Commissioning test procedures may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are impractical.
I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC&R system, document the deficiency and report it to Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.
J. If seasonal testing is specified, complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.
K. Coordinate schedule with, and perform the following activities at the direction of, Commissioning Coordinator.
L. Comply with construction checklist requirements, including material verification, installation checks, start-up, and performance tests requirements specified in Sections specifying HVAC systems and equipment.
M. Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to complete and document the following:
1. Performance tests.
2. Demonstration of a sample of performance tests.
3. Commissioning tests.
4. Commissioning test demonstrations.
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
23 08 00 - 5
Carlsbad Harding Center
3.2 TAB COMMISSIONING TESTS
A. TAB Verification:
1. Prerequisites: Completion of "Examination" Article requirements and correction of deficiencies, as specified in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
2. Completion of "Preparation" Article requirements for preparation of a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures, and system-readiness checks and reports, as specified in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
3. Scope: HVAC&R air systems and hydronic piping systems.
4. Purpose: Differential flow relationships intended to maintain air pressurization differentials between the various areas of Project.
5. Conditions of the Test:
a. Commissioning Test Demonstration Sampling Rate: As specified in "Inspections" Article in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
b. Systems operating in full heating mode with minimum outside-air volume.
c. Systems operating in full cooling mode with minimum outside-air volume.
d. For measurements at air-handling units with economizer controls; systems operating in economizer mode with 100 percent outside air.
6. Acceptance Criteria:
a. Under all conditions, rechecked measurements comply with "Inspections" Article in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." b. Additionally, no rechecked measurement shall differ from measurements documented in the final report by more than two times the tolerances allowed.
c. Under all conditions, where the Contract Documents indicate a differential in airflow between supply and exhaust and/or return in a space, the differential relationship shall be maintained.
3.3 FAN COIL AIR-HANDLING SYSTEM COMMISSIONING TESTS
A. Supply Fan(s) Variable-Volume Control:
1. Prerequisites: Installation verification of the following:
a. Volume Control Input Device: Static-pressure transmitter Differential- pressure switch sensing supply-duct static pressure referenced to conditioned-space static pressure.
b. Volume Control Output Device: DDC system analog output to modulating damper actuator.
c. Volume Control Input Device: Static-pressure transmitter Differential- pressure switch sensing supply-duct static pressure referenced to conditioned-space static pressure.
d. Volume Control Output Device: DDC system analog output to motor speed controller. Set variable-speed drive to minimum speed when fan is stopped.
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
23 08 00 - 6
Carlsbad Harding Center
e. High-Pressure Input Device: Static-pressure transmitter sensing supply- duct static pressure referenced to static pressure outside the duct. f. High-Pressure Output Device: DDC system binary output. g. Display the following at the operator's workstation:
1) Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure indication.
2) Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure set point.
3) Supply-fan airflow rate.
2. Scope: Variable-air-volume supply fan units and associated controls.
3. Purpose:
a. Supply-air discharge static pressure control.
b. Response to excess supply-air discharge static pressure condition.
4. Conditions of the Test:
a. Minimum supply-air flow.
b. Midrange Supply-Air Flow: 50 to 60 percent of maximum. c. Maximum supply-air flow.
d. Excess supply-air discharge static pressure.
5. Acceptance Criteria:
a. At all supply-air flow rates, and during changes in supply-air flow, discharge air static pressure is at set point plus or minus 2 percent. b. Fan stops and an alarm is initiated at the operator's workstation when supply-air discharge static pressure is at the excess static pressure plus or minus 2 percent.
B. Air-Handler Mixed-Air Control:
1. Prerequisites: Installation verification of the following:
a. Minimum Position Input Device: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device: DDC system analog output to modulating damper actuator(s).
c. Heating Reset Input Device: Room thermostat.
d. Mixed-Air Temperature Input Device: Duct-mounted thermostat. e. Cooling Reset Input Device: Outdoor- and return-air, duct-mounted thermostats.
f. Display the following at the operator's workstation:
1) Mixed-air-temperature indication.
2) Mixed-air-temperature set point.
3) Mixed-air damper position.
2. Scope: Air handler with mixed-air control and associated controls.
3. Purpose:
a. Occupied time control.
b. Minimum damper position control.
c. Heating reset control.
d. Mixed-air temperature control.
e. Cooling reset control.
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
23 08 00 - 7
Carlsbad Harding Center
f. Unoccupied time control.
4. Conditions of the Test:
a. Occupied Time Control: Start in unoccupied schedule. Advance to occupied schedule time.
b. Minimum Damper Position Control: Command system to mode in which minimum damper position is required.
c. Heating Reset Control: Create a call for heating.
d. Mixed-Air Temperature Control: Override supply-air temperature set point to a value 2.0 deg F above current mixed-air temperature. e. Cooling Reset Control: Override outdoor-air enthalpy to a value that exceeds return-air enthalpy.
f. Unoccupied Time Control: Advance to unoccupied schedule time. g. Control Data Trend Log: Set up a data trend log of the following input device values and output device commands. Record data at hourly intervals. Submit trend data for 24-hour periods in which natural conditions require heating reset control, mixed-air temperature control, and cooling reset control.
1) Minimum position input device.
2) Heating reset input device.
3) Mixed-air temperature input device.
4) Cooling reset input device.
5. Acceptance Criteria:
a. Occupied Time Control: Mixed-air control is active in occupied mode. b. Minimum Damper Position Control: Controller positions outdoor-air dampers to minimum position.
c. Heating Reset Control: Controller sets outdoor-air dampers to minimum position.
d. Mixed-Air Temperature Control: Controller modulates outdoor-, return-, and relief-air dampers to maintain temporary mixed-air temperature set point plus or minus 1.0 deg F.
e. Cooling Reset Control: Controller sets outdoor-air dampers to minimum position when outdoor-air enthalpy exceeds return-air enthalpy. f. Unoccupied Time Control: Controller positions outdoor- and relief-air dampers closed and return-air dampers open.
g. Control Data Trend Log: Data verifies control according to sequence of control.
END OF SECTION 23 08 00
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 23 31 13
METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.
2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.
3. Sheet metal materials.
4. Sealants and gaskets.
5. Hangers and supports.
6. Seismic-restraint devices.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.
2. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound -control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:
1. Sealants and gaskets.
2. Seismic-restraint devices.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.
2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.
3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static -pressure classes.
4. Elevation of top and bottom of ducts.
5. Dimensions of main all duct runs from building grid lines.
6. Fittings.
7. Reinforcement and spacing.
8. Seam and joint construction.
9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 2
Carlsbad Harding Center
11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels.
12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, seismic restraints, and vibration isolation.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: A single set of plans or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports.
3. AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and ASCE/SEI 7. Seismically brace duct hangers and supports in accordance with SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems." B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Startup." D. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
E. Duct Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, all duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are inside clear dimensions and do not include insulation or duct wall thickness.
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 3
Carlsbad Harding Center
2.2 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static -pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated.
2. For ducts exposed to weather, construct of Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel indicated by manufacturer to be suitable for outdoor installation.
B. Transverse Joints: Fabricate joints in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1. For ducts with longest side less than 36 inches, select joint types in accordance with Figure 2-1.
2. For ducts with longest side 36 inches or greater, use flange joint connector Type T-22, T -24, T -24A, T -25a, or T -25b. Factory -fabricated flanged duct connection system may be used if submitted and approved by engineer of record.
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. All longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh lock seams unless otherwise specified for specific application.
D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.3 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated.
2. For ducts exposed to weather, construct of Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel indicated by manufacturer to be suitable for outdoor installation.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60Inches in Diameter: Flanged.
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 4
Carlsbad Harding Center
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt -welded longitudinal seams.
2. Fabricate flat -oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with butt-welded longitudinal seams.
D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3 -6, "Conical Tees," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.
2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A1008/A1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.
D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A480/A480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
1. Where black - and galvanized -steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.
F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch- minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch- minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS
A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface -burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame -spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke - developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 5
Carlsbad Harding Center
1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.
2. Tape Width: 6 inches.
3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.
4. Water resistant.
5. Mold and mildew resistant.
6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10 inch wg, positive and negative.
7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.
8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum.
10. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less.
11. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1. Application Method: Brush on.
2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
4. Water resistant.
5. Mold and mildew resistant.
6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10 inch wg, positive and negative.
8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.
9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1. Application Method: Brush on.
2. Base: Synthetic rubber resin.
3. Solvent: Toluene and heptane.
4. Solids Content: Minimum 60 percent.
5. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 60.
6. Water resistant.
7. Mold and mildew resistant.
8. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less.
9. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
10. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.
11. Service: Indoor or outdoor.
12. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
E. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C920.
1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.
2. Type: S.
3. Grade: NS.
4. Class: 25.
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 6
Carlsbad Harding Center
5. Use: O.
6. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less.
7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
G. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:
1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1 -inch wg and shall be rated for10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.
2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.
3. Double-lipped, EPDM O -ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory -fabricated couplings and fitting spigots.
2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Galvanized-steel rods and nuts.
B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all -thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5- 2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A603.
E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A492.
F. Steel Cable End Connections: Galvanized -steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.
H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.
2.7 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 7
Carlsbad Harding Center
B. Channel Support System: Shop - or field -fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end.
Include matching components and corrosion-resistant coating.
C. Restraint Cables: ASTM A492, stainless -steel cables with end connections made of galvanized-steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or double-cable clips.
D. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted -support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod.
E. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested in accordance with ASTM E488/E488M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air -handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and coordination drawings.
B. Install ducts in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install ducts in maximum practical lengths with fewest possible joints.
D. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.
F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.
G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
H. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.
I. Where ducts pass through non -fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
J. Install fire , combination fire/smoke, and smoke dampers where indicated on Drawings and as required by code, and by local authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 8
Carlsbad Harding Center
requirements in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and specific installation requirements of the damper UL listing.
K. Install heating coils, cooling coils, air filters, dampers, and all other duct -mounted accessories in air ducts where indicated on Drawings.
L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials both before and after installation. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."
M. Elbows: Use long-radius elbows wherever they fit.
1. Fabricate 90-degree rectangular mitered elbows to include turning vanes.
2. Fabricate 90 -degree round elbows with a minimum of three segments for 12 inches and smaller and a minimum of five segments for 14 inches and larger.
N. Branch Connections: Use lateral or conical branch connections.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.
C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter.
When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.
3.3 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR LABORATORY EXHAUST AND FUME
HOOD EXHAUST DUCTS
A. Install ducts in accordance with NFPA 45, "Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals."
B. Install exhaust ducts without dips and traps that may hold water. Slope ducts a minimum of 2 percent back to hood or inlet. Where indicated on Drawings, install trapped drain piping.
C. Connect duct to fan, fume hood, and other equipment indicated on Drawings.
3.4 DUCTWORK EXPOSED TO WEATHER
A. All external joints are to have secure watertight mechanical connections . Seal all openings to provide weatherproof construction.
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 9
Carlsbad Harding Center
B. Construct ductwork to resist external loads of wind, snow, ice, and other effects of weather. Provide necessary supporting structures.
C. Single Wall:
1. Ductwork shall be Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel.
2. Ductwork shall be galvanized steel.
a. If duct outer surface is uninsulated, protect outer surface with suitable paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting."
3. Where ducts have external insulation, provide weatherproof aluminum jacket.
See Section 23 07 13 "Duct Insulation."
3.5 DUCT SEALING
A. Seal ducts for duct static -pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
B. Seal ducts at a minimum to the following seal classes in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":
1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.
3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.
4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.
5. Unconditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class B.
6. Unconditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class A.
7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.
8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.
9. Conditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower:
Seal Class C.
10. Conditioned Space, Supply -Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class B.
11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.
12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."
B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder -actuated fasteners, or structural -steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
2. Install powder -actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 10
Carlsbad Harding Center
3. Use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for standard -weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.
4. Do not use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight -aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.
D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.
F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull -out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.7 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."
1. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o.c.
2. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.
B. Select seismic -restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads.
C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators.
E. Install seismic -restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members.
G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling. Notify Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 11
Carlsbad Harding Center
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy - duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.
4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
5. Install zinc -coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless -steel anchors for applications exposed to weather.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.9 PAINTING
A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized - steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 09 91 10 Interior and Exterior Painting."
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Leakage Tests:
1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test.
2. Test the following systems:
a. Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 3-Inch wg: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.
b. Supply Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2- Inch wg or Higher: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. c. Return Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2- Inch wg or Higher: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. d. Exhaust Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2- Inch wg or Higher: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. e. Outdoor-Air Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.
3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 12
Carlsbad Harding Center
4. Testing of each duct section is to be performed with access doors, coils, filters, dampers, and other duct -mounted devices in place as designed. No devices are to be removed or blanked off so as to reduce or prevent additional leakage.
5. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.
6. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If static -pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.
7. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:
1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.
2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness in accordance with "Description of Method 3 - NADCA Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems." a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.
D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.11 DUCT CLEANING
A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Use duct cleaning methodology as indicated in NADCA ACR.
C. Use service openings for entry and inspection.
1. Provide openings with access panels appropriate for duct static -pressure and leakage class at dampers, coils, and any other locations where required for inspection and cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer.
Comply with Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.
2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.
D. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:
1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with
99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.
2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.
E. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 13
Carlsbad Harding Center
2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.
3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
4. Coils and related components.
5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms.
6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.
F. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
2. Use vacuum -collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning.
Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.
3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
4. Clean fibrous -glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous -glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.
5. Clean coils and coil drain pans in accordance with NADCA ACR. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.
6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.
7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA -registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.
3.12 STARTUP
A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
3.13 DUCT SCHEDULE
A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:
1. Fabricate all ducts to achieve SMACNA pressure class, seal class, and leakage class as indicated below.
B. Supply Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 2.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 2.
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 14
Carlsbad Harding Center
2. Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 2.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 2.
C. Return Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 2.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 2.
2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 2.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 2.
D. Exhaust Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 2.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 2.
2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units <Insert equipment>:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 2.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 2.
3. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting Fume Hood, Laboratory, and Process (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 3 and Class 4) Air:
a. Type 316 or Type 304, stainless-steel sheet.
1) Exposed to View: No. 4 finish.
2) Concealed: No. 2B finish.
b. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg.
c. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class A Welded seams and joints. d. SMACNA Leakage Class 2.
e. Airtight/watertight.
E. Intermediate Reinforcement:
1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel or carbon steel coated with zinc - chromate primer.
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 15
Carlsbad Harding Center
2. Stainless-Steel Ducts:
a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.
b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.
F. Elbow Configuration:
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.
3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.
3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius -to-diameter ratio and two vanes.
c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."
a. Minimum Radius -to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90 -degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.
1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius -to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow.
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 16
Carlsbad Harding Center
2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm : 1.0 radius -to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow.
3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow.
4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.
G. Branch Configuration:
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Conical spin in.
2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.
b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.
c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.
END OF SECTION 23 31 13
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00 - 1
Carlsbad Harding Center
SECTION 23 33 00
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.
2. Manual volume dampers.
3. Control dampers.
4. Fire dampers.
5. Smoke dampers.
6. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
7. Corridor dampers.
8. Flange connectors.
9. Turning vanes.
10. Duct-mounted access doors.
11. Flexible connectors.
12. Duct security bars.
13. Duct accessory hardware.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 23 33 46 "Flexible Ducts" for insulated and non-insulated flexible ducts.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data.
Include breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.
B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.
1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:
a. Special fittings.
b. Manual volume damper installations.
c. Control-damper installations.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00 - 2
Carlsbad Harding Center
d. Fire-damper, smoke -damper, combination fire - and smoke -damper, ceiling, and corridor damper installations, including sleeves; and duct - mounted access doors and remote damper operators.
e. Duct security bars.
f. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling -mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved.
B. Source quality-control reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.
2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A480/A480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish for concealed ducts and finish for exposed ducts.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00 - 3
Carlsbad Harding Center
C. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
D. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.
E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless -steel ducts.
F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8- inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.3 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS
A. Description: Gravity balanced.
B. Maximum Air Velocity: 1000 fpm.
C. Maximum System Pressure: 1-inch wg.
D. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel, with welded corners or mechanically attached and mounting flange.
E. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.050-inch- thick aluminum sheet with sealed edges.
F. Blade Action: Parallel.
G. Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked.
H. Blade Axles:
1. Material: Stainless steel.
2. Diameter: 0.20 inch.
I. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
J. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
K. Bearings: Steel ball.
L. Accessories:
1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.
3. Electric actuators.
4. Chain pulls.
5. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.
a. Sleeve Thickness: 20 gauge minimum.
b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum.
6. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted.
7. Screen Material: Galvanized steel.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00 - 4
Carlsbad Harding Center
8. Screen Type: Bird.
9. 90-degree stops.
2.4 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.
2. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
3. Frames:
a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel. b. Mitered and welded corners.
c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
4. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade.
b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d. Stainless-steel, 0.064 inch thick.
5. Blade Axles: Stainless steel.
6. Bearings:
a. Stainless-steel sleeve.
b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
7. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
B. Jackshaft:
1. Size: 1-inch diameter.
2. Material: Galvanized -steel pipe rotating within pipe -bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly.
C. Damper Hardware:
1. Zinc-plated, die -cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc - plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.
2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.
3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.5 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00 - 5
Carlsbad Harding Center
B. Frames:
1. Hat shaped.
2. 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel.
3. Mitered and welded corners.
C. Blades:
1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 6 inches.
2. Opposed-blade design.
3. Stainless steel.
4. 0.0747-inch- thick dual skin.
5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene.
6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.
D. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch- diameter; stainless steel ; blade -linkage hardware of zinc -plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.
1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
E. Bearings:
1. Stainless-steel sleeve.
2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
2.6 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Type: Static and dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.
B. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity.
C. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.
D. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when located behind grille where blades may be inside airstream ; fabricated with roll -formed galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners; gauge in accordance with UL listing.
E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel; gauge in accordance with UL listing.
F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
G. Blades: Roll -formed, interlocking, galvanized sheet steel; gauge in accordance with UL listing.
H. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.
I. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00 - 6
Carlsbad Harding Center
2.7 SMOKE DAMPERS
A. General Requirements: Label according to UL 555S by an NRTL.
B. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.
C. Frame: Hat -shaped, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange ; gauge in accordance with UL listing.
D. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking overlapping, galvanized sheet steel; gauge in accordance with UL listing.
E. Leakage: Class I Class II.
F. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
G. Mounting Sleeve: Factory -installed, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application with factory-furnished silicone caulking; gauge in accordance with UL listing.
H. Damper Motors: Two-position action.
I. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in the drawings.
3. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded -Pole Motors: With oil -immersed and sealed gear trains.
4. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral -spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf.
5. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor -Air Intakes: Equip with O -ring gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F.
6. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. , size motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.
J. Accessories:
1. Auxiliary switches for signaling fan control or position indication.
2. Test and reset switches mounted.
2.8 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S by an NRTL.
B. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity.
C. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00 - 7
Carlsbad Harding Center
D. Frame: Hat -shaped, galvanized sheet steel, with welded or mechanically attached corners and mounting flange; gauge in accordance with UL listing.
E. Heat-Responsive Device: Resettable 165 deg F rated, fusible links.
F. Heat-Responsive Device: Electric resettable link and switch package, factory installed, rated.
G. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.
H. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking overlapping, galvanized sheet steel; gauge in accordance with UL listing.
I. Leakage: Class I Class II.
J. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
K. Mounting Sleeve: Factory -installed, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application with factory-furnished silicone caulking; gauge in accordance with UL listing.
L. Master control panel for use in dynamic smoke-management systems.
M. Damper Motors: two-position action.
N. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in the drawings.
3. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded -Pole Motors: With oil -immersed and sealed gear trains.
4. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral -spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf.
5. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor -Air Intakes: Equip with O -ring gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F.
6. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. , size motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.
O. Accessories:
1. Auxiliary switches for signaling fan control or position indication.
2. Test and reset switches mounted.
2.9 CORRIDOR DAMPERS
A. General Requirements: Label combination fire and smoke dampers according to UL 555 for 1-hour or 1-1/2-hour rating by an NRTL.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00 - 8
Carlsbad Harding Center
B. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.
C. Heat-Responsive Device: Electric resettable link and switch package, factory installed, rated.
D. Frame: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange ; gauge in accordance with UL listing.
E. Blades: Roll -formed, horizontal, interlocking overlapping, galvanized sheet steel; gauge in accordance with UL listing.
F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory -installed, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application; gauge in accordance with UL listing.
G. Damper Motors: two-position action.
H. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Section 23 09 23 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC."
3. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded -Pole Motors: With oil -immersed and sealed gear trains.
4. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral -spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf.
5. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor -Air Intakes: Equip with O -ring gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F.
6. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. , size motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.
2.10 FLANGE CONNECTORS
A. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory -fabricated, slide -on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.
B. Material: Galvanized steel.
C. Gauge and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.
2.11 TURNING VANES
A. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00 - 9
Carlsbad Harding Center
1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil -shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin - bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4 -4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
D. Vane Construction: Single wall.
E. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions.
2.12 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
A. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."
1. Door:
a. Double wall, rectangular.
b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class.
c. Vision panel.
d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
3. Number of Hinges and Locks:
a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.
b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches : Continuous and two compression latches with outside and inside handles.
d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches : Continuous and two compression latches with outside and inside handles.
2.13 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES
A. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.
B. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel.
C. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.
D. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease -tight, high -temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000 deg F.